PAC INTERNATIONAL LTDA Stanley Security Solutions Business

1 Park Gate Close, Bredbury, Stockport, SK6 2SZ, EnglandTel: +44 (0) 161 406 3400. Fax: +44 (0) 161 430 8658

www.pac.co.uk

PAC SecureNetUser Guide

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 August 2006

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 ii

Issue RecordVersion Date Details

2.00 Mar 04 Administration Software 2.0 helpfile

2.10 Jul 04 Keyholder search updated and event archiving added. Magstripespecification moved to customisation. Encoder added

2.20 Nov 04 Lift control added. CCTV added.

2.21 Jan 05 Technical support telephone number updated. Bolt door overrides timeprofile.

2.60 Jul 05 IP Address Configuration of 500, 512IP and 2200IP

2200 local alarms added

2.61 Nov 05 All facilities included in one document

3.10 Aug 06 AEM, Multiple Org Units, Muster, Audit Trail, etc. added

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 iii

Version 3.10 Aug 2006Changes are periodically made to the product and these changes will be incorporated into neweditions of this manual. Stanley Security Solutions shall not be liable for errors contained hereinor for any consequential damages connected with the use of this material.

Copyright and Protective Notices1. The copyright of this document and the associated drawings is the property of Stanley

Security Solutions, and is issued on condition that it is not copied, reprinted or reproduced,nor its contents disclosed, either wholly or in part, without the consent in writing of, or inaccordance with the conditions of a contract with Stanley Security Solutions.

2. The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or otherprotective rights of Stanley Security Solutions, or others.

3. Performance figures and data quoted in this document are typical, and must be specificallyconfirmed by Stanley Security Solutions before they become applicable to any tender, orderor contract.

Training and Technical Support (PAC only)Training courses covering the installation and use of all products are regularly held at PACINTERNATIONAL LTD, Stockport. For further information on course availability, or to discussyour specific requirements, contact the Training Manager at the address below.

It is strongly recommended that any persons installing or commissioning productsattend a suitable training course beforehand.

Technical Support for all products is available during normal office hours:

8:30am to 5:30pm (UK time) Monday to Friday, excluding public holidays.

Tel: 0870 7203400 International +44 870 7203400Fax: 0870 7203411 International +44 870 7203411

Email: technical@pac.co.uk

This service is provided primarily for the use of trained users. End users of products should firstof all contact their installation or maintenance company before contacting PAC.

PAC INTERNATIONAL LTDA Stanley Security Solutions Business1 Park Gate CloseBredburyStockportSK6 2SZEngland

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 iv

IMPORTANT:When installing the hardware the following should be noted:HEALTH AND SAFETYInstallation must be wired in accordance with National Wiring Regulations (BS7671, IEENational Wiring Regulations in the UK). Failure to do so can result in injury or death byelectric shock.It must also comply with any local Fire, Health and Safety regulations. A secured doorthat may be part of an escape route from an area must be fitted with:• A fail-safe lock (A) so that the door will be released if the power fails. Ideally a

magnetic lock should be used as these are less likely to jam or seize.• A normally-closed break-glass or manual pull (B) in the lock supply wiring so that in

an emergency the fail-safe lock can be immediately depowered.

BA

The controller must be earthed.Isolate the controller power supply before working on the controller.CablingThe cabling used in the PAC Access Control Systems (RS-232, RS-485, reader cables, etc.)are not prone to electrical interference. However, you should avoid routing cable close to heavyload switching cables and equipment. If this is unavoidable, cross the cable at right anglesevery 3.3-6.6ft/1-2m to reduce the interference.

ESD PrecautionsThe 500 series of controllers contain static-sensitive devices; an earth grounding strap shouldbe worn when maintaining a running system.

RFID DevicesAs similar RFID technology is now widely used in a number of other industries, for exampleautomotive immobilisers, it is possible that interaction between your access control ID and otherdevices may cause one or the other to function incorrectly. Should you suspect that you haveexperienced such a problem the solution is to separate your access control ID from other RFIDdevices.

Lithium BatteriesThere is a danger of explosion if lithium batteries are incorrectly replaced or handled. Pleaseread carefully the following guidelines. Failure to do so can result in injury.1. Take steps to ensure that the batteries are never short circuited.2. Always store the batteries separately in non-conducting materials.3. Do not place lithium batteries with normal waste collections; dispose of them correctly.For information on the disposal of used lithium batteries and your local disposal sites, call theEnvironment Agency Helpline (UK only) on 08459 333111.

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 v

Table of Contents1. Introduction to Help File ......................................................................................................... 1

1.1 Displaying Help Information ................................................................................................ 11.2 Tab Area Facilities............................................................................................................... 11.3 Toolbar Facilities ................................................................................................................. 11.4 Browse Facilities ................................................................................................................. 2

2. Specifications .......................................................................................................................... 32.1 Administration Software Specifications............................................................................... 3

2.1.1 System Limits............................................................................................................. 32.1.2 Administration Features ............................................................................................. 4

2.2 Hardware Specifications ..................................................................................................... 52.2.1 500 Specifications...................................................................................................... 52.2.2 512 Specifications...................................................................................................... 62.2.3 520/530 I/O Controllers.............................................................................................. 7

3. Administration Software......................................................................................................... 83.1.1 Introduction to the Administration Software ............................................................... 83.1.2 Installation .................................................................................................................. 83.1.3 Updates...................................................................................................................... 9

3.2 Access Control Overview .................................................................................................. 103.2.1 System Design......................................................................................................... 10

3.2.1.1 Access Types................................................................................................... 103.2.1.2 System Design................................................................................................. 103.2.1.3 System Plan..................................................................................................... 113.2.1.4 Hardware Configuration using 500 Channel ................................................... 123.2.1.5 Hardware Configuration using Offline Channel ............................................... 13

3.2.2 Simple Example ....................................................................................................... 143.2.2.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 143.2.2.2 Define the Areas .............................................................................................. 14

3.2.3 Add the 500 TCP/IP channel ................................................................................... 153.2.3.1 Add and Probe the Controller .......................................................................... 153.2.3.2 Define the Holiday Profiles .............................................................................. 153.2.3.3 Define the Time/Mode Profiles ........................................................................ 163.2.3.4 Update the Doors............................................................................................. 173.2.3.5 Define Access Groups ..................................................................................... 183.2.3.6 Add Keyholders................................................................................................ 183.2.3.7 Add Operators.................................................................................................. 183.2.3.8 Download Database to the Controller.............................................................. 19

3.3 Administration Software Tools .......................................................................................... 203.3.1 Help.......................................................................................................................... 203.3.2 500 Manual .............................................................................................................. 203.3.3 Restore Database .................................................................................................... 203.3.4 Release Notes ......................................................................................................... 203.3.5 Service Manager...................................................................................................... 203.3.6 Application Software ................................................................................................ 213.3.7 Configure Device IP Addresses............................................................................... 21

3.4 Administration Software Overview .................................................................................... 233.4.1 Login ........................................................................................................................ 233.4.2 Administration Software Window ............................................................................. 243.4.3 Welcome Screen...................................................................................................... 253.4.4 Menus ...................................................................................................................... 26

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 vi

3.4.5 Toolbar ..................................................................................................................... 303.4.6 Explorer Bar ............................................................................................................. 323.4.7 Status Bar ................................................................................................................ 333.4.8 List View................................................................................................................... 333.4.9 Property Page .......................................................................................................... 343.4.10 Logoff ..................................................................................................................... 35

3.5 Organisation Options......................................................................................................... 363.5.1 Customisation .......................................................................................................... 363.5.2 System Settings ....................................................................................................... 363.5.3 Card Format ............................................................................................................. 37

3.5.3.1 Proximity Reader ............................................................................................. 373.5.3.2 Magnetic Stripe ................................................................................................ 383.5.3.3 Wiegand (2601 format) .................................................................................... 403.5.3.4 Adding or Editing a Card Format ..................................................................... 41

3.5.4 Event Archiving ........................................................................................................ 423.5.5 System Access......................................................................................................... 433.5.6 Organisational Unit Details ...................................................................................... 433.5.7 Access...................................................................................................................... 443.5.8 Custom Labels ......................................................................................................... 443.5.9 Categories................................................................................................................ 453.5.10 Keyholder Extra Details ......................................................................................... 463.5.11 Alarms .................................................................................................................... 46

3.6 Organisational Units .......................................................................................................... 483.6.1 Organisational Units List .......................................................................................... 483.6.2 Organisational Unit Details ...................................................................................... 48

3.7 Keyholders ........................................................................................................................ 493.7.1 Keyholder List View ................................................................................................. 493.7.2 Keyholder Property Page......................................................................................... 49

3.7.2.1 Keyholder Details............................................................................................. 493.7.2.2 Keyholder Personal Details ............................................................................. 513.7.2.3 Keyholder Notes .............................................................................................. 513.7.2.4 Keyholder Keys................................................................................................ 513.7.2.5 Keyholder Extra Information ............................................................................ 523.7.2.6 Keyholder Personal Access............................................................................. 533.7.2.7 Keyholder Access Groups ............................................................................... 543.7.2.8 Keyholder Events............................................................................................. 543.7.2.9 Keyholder Area Usage..................................................................................... 55

3.7.3 Add/Update/Delete a Keyholder .............................................................................. 553.8 Guests ............................................................................................................................... 573.9 Operators .......................................................................................................................... 58

3.9.1 Operator List View ................................................................................................... 583.9.2 Operator Property Page........................................................................................... 58

3.9.2.1 Operator Details............................................................................................... 583.9.2.2 Operator Privileges .......................................................................................... 603.9.2.3 Operator Alarm Viewer .................................................................................... 61

3.9.3 Add/Update/Delete an Operator .............................................................................. 613.9.4 Specifying a Keyholder as an Operator ................................................................... 62

3.10 Time & Mode Profiles ...................................................................................................... 633.10.1 Time & Mode Profile List View............................................................................... 633.10.2 Time & Mode Profile Property Page ...................................................................... 63

3.10.2.1 Daily Time Profiles ......................................................................................... 633.10.2.2 Weekly Time Profiles ..................................................................................... 643.10.2.3 Mode Profiles ................................................................................................. 65

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 vii

3.10.2.4 Area Mode Profile Access Options................................................................ 663.10.2.5 Holiday Time Profile....................................................................................... 66

3.10.3 Add/Update/Delete a Time/Mode Profile ............................................................... 673.11 Holiday Profiles ............................................................................................................... 69

3.11.1 Holiday Profile List View ........................................................................................ 693.11.2 Holiday Profile Property Page................................................................................ 693.11.3 Add/Update/Delete a Holiday Profile ..................................................................... 70

3.12 Areas ............................................................................................................................... 713.12.1 Area List View ........................................................................................................ 713.12.2 Area Property Page ............................................................................................... 71

3.12.2.1 Area Details ................................................................................................... 713.12.2.2 Area Appearance........................................................................................... 723.12.2.3 Area Alarm Management............................................................................... 723.12.2.4 Area Alarm Definitions ................................................................................... 733.12.2.5 Area Alarm Points .......................................................................................... 733.12.2.6 Area Outputs.................................................................................................. 743.12.2.7 Area Management ......................................................................................... 753.12.2.8 Area Security Level........................................................................................ 76

3.12.3 Add/Update/Delete an Area................................................................................... 763.13 Access Groups ................................................................................................................ 77

3.13.1 Access Group List View......................................................................................... 773.13.2 Access Group Property Page ................................................................................ 77

3.13.2.1 Access Group Details .................................................................................... 773.13.2.2 Access Group Access.................................................................................... 773.13.2.3 Access Group Advanced ............................................................................... 78

3.13.3 Add/Update/Delete an Access Group.................................................................... 793.14 Hardware......................................................................................................................... 80

3.14.1 Hardware List View ................................................................................................ 803.14.2 Channel Property Page.......................................................................................... 83

3.14.2.1 Channel Details.............................................................................................. 833.14.2.2 Channel Areas ............................................................................................... 843.14.2.3 Channel 500................................................................................................... 843.14.2.4 Channel Alarm Management ......................................................................... 853.14.2.5 Channel Settings............................................................................................ 853.14.2.6 Channel Dialup .............................................................................................. 863.14.2.7 Channel Dialback........................................................................................... 873.14.2.8 Channel Layout.............................................................................................. 883.14.2.9 Add/Update/Delete a Channel ....................................................................... 88

3.14.3 Controller Property Page ....................................................................................... 903.14.3.1 Controller Details ........................................................................................... 903.14.3.2 Controller Information .................................................................................... 913.14.3.3 Controller 2100/2200 ..................................................................................... 923.14.3.4 Controller Doors............................................................................................. 933.14.3.5 Controller Inputs............................................................................................. 933.14.3.6 Controller Outputs.......................................................................................... 96Manual ......................................................................................................................... 98Local Area Alarm ......................................................................................................... 983.14.3.7 Controller Alarm Management..................................................................... 1003.14.3.8 Add/Update/Delete a Controller................................................................... 1003.14.3.9 Probe/Configure/Unconfigure Controllers.................................................... 1013.14.3.10 Online Controller Tasks ............................................................................. 101

3.14.4 Offline Channel and Controller Tasks.................................................................. 1033.14.4.1 Download Database to the Controllers using the PC.................................. 103

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 viii

3.14.4.2 Download Database to the Controllers using the PDA................................ 1043.14.4.3 Upload Database from PDA to a PC ........................................................... 104

3.14.5 Lift Property Page ................................................................................................ 1053.14.5.1 Lift Details .................................................................................................... 1053.14.5.2 Lift Destinations ........................................................................................... 1053.14.5.3 Lift Access.................................................................................................... 106

3.14.6 Add/Update/Delete a Lift Reader......................................................................... 1073.15 Doors............................................................................................................................. 108

3.15.1 Door List View...................................................................................................... 1083.15.2 Door Property Page ............................................................................................. 108

3.15.2.1 Door Details ................................................................................................. 1083.15.2.2 Door Access................................................................................................. 1093.15.2.3 Door Configuration....................................................................................... 110Controller.................................................................................................................... 1123.15.2.4 Door Auxiliary IO.......................................................................................... 1133.15.2.5 Door Alarm Management............................................................................. 1143.15.2.6 Door Security Level ..................................................................................... 115

3.15.3 Add/Update/Delete a Door................................................................................... 1153.16 Video Source................................................................................................................. 116

3.16.1 Video Source List View ........................................................................................ 1163.16.2 Video Source Property Page ............................................................................... 116

3.16.2.1 Video Source Property Page ....................................................................... 1163.16.2.2 Add/Update/Delete a Video Source............................................................. 116

3.16.3 Video Sources - Configure................................................................................... 1173.16.3.1 Configuring Video Sources .......................................................................... 1173.16.3.2 Video Sources - General Tab ...................................................................... 117Address ...................................................................................................................... 1173.16.3.3 Video Sources - Presets Tab....................................................................... 1183.16.3.4 Presets Tab - General Tab .......................................................................... 1183.16.3.5 Presets Tab - View Tab ............................................................................... 1193.16.3.6 Presets Tab - Alarm Points.......................................................................... 119

3.17 Reports.......................................................................................................................... 1203.17.1 Report Facilities ................................................................................................... 1203.17.2 Reports Provided ................................................................................................. 1213.17.3 Report Search Parameters .................................................................................. 1233.17.4 Export a Report .................................................................................................... 1243.17.5 Add a Custom Report .......................................................................................... 124

4. Image Capture ..................................................................................................................... 1254.1 Image Capture Introduction............................................................................................. 1254.2 Using the Image Capture Utility ...................................................................................... 1254.3 Capture Source ............................................................................................................... 1254.4 Preview Window.............................................................................................................. 126

5. ID Card Designer ................................................................................................................. 1275.1 Card Designer Introduction ............................................................................................. 127

5.1.1 Displaying the Card Designer ................................................................................ 1275.1.2 Interactive Map....................................................................................................... 127

5.2 Card Designer Menus ..................................................................................................... 1275.2.1 Design Menu.......................................................................................................... 1275.2.2 Edit Menu ............................................................................................................... 1275.2.3 View Menu ............................................................................................................. 1285.2.4 Help Menu.............................................................................................................. 128

5.3 Toolbar, Browser and Status Bar .................................................................................... 128

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 ix

5.3.1 Card Designer Toolbar........................................................................................... 1285.3.2 Card Designer Browser.......................................................................................... 1295.3.3 Card Designer Status Bar ...................................................................................... 129

5.4 Design Regions ............................................................................................................... 1295.4.1 Add Items Region .................................................................................................. 129

5.4.1.1 Creating Designs ........................................................................................... 1305.4.1.2 ID-Card Design Overview .............................................................................. 130

5.4.2 Card Face Region.................................................................................................. 1305.4.2.1 Selecting Card Faces .................................................................................... 1305.4.2.2 Mouse Coordinates........................................................................................ 1305.4.2.3 Card Face Properties..................................................................................... 1305.4.2.4 Rulers............................................................................................................. 1305.4.2.5 Viewing Card Face Properties ....................................................................... 1315.4.2.6 Editing Card Face Properties......................................................................... 131

5.4.3 Properties Region .................................................................................................. 1315.4.3.1 Editing Item Properties .................................................................................. 1315.4.3.2 Update / Exit .................................................................................................. 131

5.4.4 Buttons Region....................................................................................................... 1315.4.4.1 Assign a Name to this Item............................................................................ 1315.4.4.2 Update Button ................................................................................................ 1315.4.4.3 Exit Button...................................................................................................... 131

5.5 Card Design Overview .................................................................................................... 1325.5.1 Drawing and Placing Items .................................................................................... 132

5.5.1.1 Dragging and Dropping.................................................................................. 1325.5.1.2 Selecting and Clicking ................................................................................... 1325.5.1.3 Fixed Shape Items......................................................................................... 1325.5.1.4 Variable Shape Items .................................................................................... 1335.5.1.5 Line ................................................................................................................ 133

5.5.2 Editing Properties................................................................................................... 1335.5.3 Grouping and Ungrouping...................................................................................... 1335.5.4 Select Mode ........................................................................................................... 1345.5.5 Move, Resize and Delete....................................................................................... 1345.5.6 Printing Double-Sided ID Cards on a Single-Sided ID Card Printer...................... 135

5.5.6.1 Printing from the ID Card Designer ............................................................... 1355.5.6.2 Batch Printing ID Cards from Keyholder Module........................................... 135

5.6 Item Properties ................................................................................................................ 1365.6.1 Multiple Item Properties ......................................................................................... 1365.6.2 Group Item ............................................................................................................. 1365.6.3 Shape Item Properties ........................................................................................... 1365.6.4 Image Item / Photo Item / Signature Item Properties............................................. 1375.6.5 Line Item Properties............................................................................................... 1375.6.6 Text Item / Text Data Properties ............................................................................ 137

5.7 Individual Properties........................................................................................................ 1385.7.1 Name Property ....................................................................................................... 1385.7.2 Units Properties ..................................................................................................... 1385.7.3 Background Properties .......................................................................................... 1385.7.4 Snap Properties ..................................................................................................... 1385.7.5 Holopatch / Magstripe / Smart Card Properties..................................................... 1395.7.6 Orientation.............................................................................................................. 1395.7.7 X, Y, Width and Height Properties ......................................................................... 1395.7.8 Aspect Lock Property............................................................................................. 1405.7.9 Anchor and Angle Properties................................................................................. 140

5.7.9.1 Anchor............................................................................................................ 140

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 x

5.7.9.2 Angle.............................................................................................................. 1405.7.10 Transparency Property ........................................................................................ 1405.7.11 Shape Properties ................................................................................................. 1415.7.12 Text Properties..................................................................................................... 141

5.7.12.1 Font .............................................................................................................. 1415.7.12.2 Multi-Line ..................................................................................................... 1415.7.12.3 Colour .......................................................................................................... 141

5.7.13 Line Properties..................................................................................................... 1415.7.13.1 Line Width .................................................................................................... 1415.7.13.2 Colour .......................................................................................................... 141

5.7.14 Image Property..................................................................................................... 1415.7.15 Shadow Properties............................................................................................... 1425.7.16 Colour Properties ................................................................................................. 1425.7.17 Data Field Property .............................................................................................. 142

5.8 Group Item Properties ..................................................................................................... 1435.8.1 Group Item Properties............................................................................................ 1435.8.2 Creating a Group ................................................................................................... 1435.8.3 Ungrouping a Group .............................................................................................. 1435.8.4 Editing Group Properties........................................................................................ 1435.8.5 Resizing a Group ................................................................................................... 143

5.9 Context Menus ................................................................................................................ 1435.9.1 Card Face .............................................................................................................. 1435.9.2 Ruler....................................................................................................................... 1445.9.3 Multiple Items ......................................................................................................... 1445.9.4 Group ..................................................................................................................... 1445.9.5 Single Items ........................................................................................................... 1445.9.6 Image ..................................................................................................................... 1445.9.7 Line ........................................................................................................................ 144

5.10 Common Items .............................................................................................................. 1455.10.1 Align to Grid ......................................................................................................... 1455.10.2 Docking Items ...................................................................................................... 145

5.10.2.1 Docking Items .............................................................................................. 1455.10.2.2 Docking Text Data Items ............................................................................. 1455.10.2.3 Moving Docked Items .................................................................................. 1455.10.2.4 Undocking items .......................................................................................... 1465.10.2.5 Preventing Docking...................................................................................... 146

5.10.3 Ordering Items / Groups on the Card Face ......................................................... 1465.10.4 Zoom Function ..................................................................................................... 1465.10.5 Measurement ....................................................................................................... 147

6. Alarm Map Designer............................................................................................................ 1486.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................... 148

6.1.1 Starting Alarm Map Designer................................................................................. 1486.1.2 Alarm Designer Interactive Map ............................................................................ 1486.1.3 Alarm Map Designer Layout .................................................................................. 1486.1.4 Making a Map......................................................................................................... 148

6.2 Alarm Map Designer Glossary ........................................................................................ 1486.3 Alarm Map Designer Interactive Map.............................................................................. 1496.4 Alarm Map Designer Menus............................................................................................ 150

6.4.1 Design Menu.......................................................................................................... 1506.4.2 Edit Menu ............................................................................................................... 1506.4.3 View Menu ............................................................................................................. 1506.4.4 Help Menu.............................................................................................................. 150

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 xi

6.5 Alarm Map Designer Toolbar .......................................................................................... 1516.6 Add Items Region............................................................................................................ 151

6.6.1 General Tab ........................................................................................................... 1516.6.1.1 Drawing and Creating Maps .......................................................................... 1526.6.1.2 Map Design Overview.................................................................................... 152

6.6.2 Areas Tab............................................................................................................... 1526.6.3 Inputs Tab .............................................................................................................. 1526.6.4 Outputs Tab ........................................................................................................... 1526.6.5 CCTV Tab .............................................................................................................. 153

6.6.5.1 Drawing and Creating Maps .......................................................................... 1536.6.5.2 Map Design Overview.................................................................................... 153

6.6.6 Alarm Points Tab.................................................................................................... 153Controllers.................................................................................................................. 153Doors.......................................................................................................................... 1536.6.6.1 Changing Alarm Point Views ......................................................................... 1536.6.6.2 Drawing and Creating Maps .......................................................................... 1546.6.6.3 Map Design Overview.................................................................................... 154

6.7 Design Editor Region ...................................................................................................... 1546.7.1 Design Editor Region Introduction ......................................................................... 154

6.7.1.1 Adding / Deleting Map Pages ........................................................................ 1546.7.1.2 Drawing and Placing Items ............................................................................ 1546.7.1.3 Editing Map Designs...................................................................................... 1546.7.1.4 Properties....................................................................................................... 1546.7.1.5 Map Making Hints .......................................................................................... 154

6.7.2 Map Making and Editing ........................................................................................ 1546.7.2.1 Map Making Hints .......................................................................................... 1546.7.2.2 Adding/Deleting/Copying Pages.................................................................... 1556.7.2.3 Alarm Viewer and Map Design Editor............................................................ 1556.7.2.4 Editing Properties........................................................................................... 1566.7.2.5 Page Tabs...................................................................................................... 1566.7.2.6 Group Item ..................................................................................................... 1576.7.2.7 Grouping and Ungrouping ............................................................................. 1576.7.2.8 Select Mode ................................................................................................... 1586.7.2.9 Move/Resize/Delete Items............................................................................. 1586.7.2.10 Drawing and Placing Items .......................................................................... 159

6.7.3 Context Menus....................................................................................................... 1606.7.3.1 Multiple Items................................................................................................. 1606.7.3.2 Page............................................................................................................... 1606.7.3.3 Ruler .............................................................................................................. 1606.7.3.4 Group ............................................................................................................. 1606.7.3.5 Single Items ................................................................................................... 1606.7.3.6 Image ............................................................................................................. 1616.7.3.7 Line ................................................................................................................ 161

6.8 Properties Region............................................................................................................ 1616.8.1 Item Properties....................................................................................................... 161

6.8.1.1 Multiple Item Properties ................................................................................. 1616.8.1.2 Group Item Properties ................................................................................... 1616.8.1.3 Shape Item Properties ................................................................................... 1626.8.1.4 Image Item Properties ................................................................................... 1626.8.1.5 Line Item Properties....................................................................................... 1636.8.1.6 Text Item Properties....................................................................................... 1636.8.1.7 View Item Properties...................................................................................... 1636.8.1.8 Button Item Properties ................................................................................... 163

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 xii

6.8.1.9 Alarm Area Properties ................................................................................... 1646.8.1.10 Alarm Point/Output Properties ..................................................................... 1646.8.1.11 Video Source Property................................................................................. 164

6.8.2 Individual Properties .............................................................................................. 1656.8.2.1 Name Property............................................................................................... 1656.8.2.2 Tooltip Property.............................................................................................. 1656.8.2.3 Action and Set Action..................................................................................... 1656.8.2.4 X, Y, Height and Width Properties ................................................................. 1656.8.2.5 Resolution and Units Properties .................................................................... 1656.8.2.6 Background Properties .................................................................................. 1666.8.2.7 Aspect Lock Property..................................................................................... 1666.8.2.8 Anchor and Angle Property............................................................................ 1666.8.2.9 Display Mode ................................................................................................. 1676.8.2.10 Transparency Property ................................................................................ 1676.8.2.11 Text Property ............................................................................................... 1676.8.2.12 Font Property ............................................................................................... 1676.8.2.13 Multi-line Property ........................................................................................ 1676.8.2.14 Colour Property............................................................................................ 1676.8.2.15 Line Width Property ..................................................................................... 1676.8.2.16 Image Property ............................................................................................ 1676.8.2.17 Shadow, Shadow X, Shadow Y and Shadow Density................................. 1686.8.2.18 Snap Grid, Snap Grid Size, Snap Grid Colour ............................................ 168

6.9 Status Bar........................................................................................................................ 1687. Alarm Viewer........................................................................................................................ 169

7.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................... 1697.2 Alarm Viewer Glossary.................................................................................................... 1697.3 Interactive Map................................................................................................................ 1707.4 Alarm Viewer Menus ....................................................................................................... 170

7.4.1 File Menu ............................................................................................................... 1707.4.2 Views Menu............................................................................................................ 1707.4.3 Active Alarms Menu ............................................................................................... 1707.4.4 Alarm Board Menu ................................................................................................. 1707.4.5 Map Menu .............................................................................................................. 1707.4.6 CCTV Menu ........................................................................................................... 1717.4.7 Context Menu......................................................................................................... 171

7.5 Alarm Viewer Toolbars.................................................................................................... 1717.5.1 Alarm Viewer Toolbar ............................................................................................ 1717.5.2 Active Alarm Toolbar.............................................................................................. 1717.5.3 Event Log Viewer Toolbar...................................................................................... 1727.5.4 Alarm History Toolbar ............................................................................................ 1727.5.5 CCTV Region Toolbar............................................................................................ 172

7.6 Alarm/Event Region ........................................................................................................ 1737.6.1 Active Alarms ......................................................................................................... 173

7.6.1.1 Alarm Information........................................................................................... 1737.6.1.2 Viewing Associated Active Alarm Information ............................................... 173

7.6.2 Managing Alarms ................................................................................................... 1737.6.3 Acknowledge Commands ...................................................................................... 174

7.6.3.1 Acknowledge.................................................................................................. 1747.6.3.2 Acknowledge All............................................................................................. 1747.6.3.3 Acknowledge Selected Command................................................................. 174

7.6.4 Silence Commands................................................................................................ 1757.6.4.1 Silence All ...................................................................................................... 175

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 xiii

7.6.5 Event Log Viewer ................................................................................................... 1757.6.5.1 Event Information List .................................................................................... 1757.6.5.2 Viewing Additional Active Alarm Information ................................................. 175

7.6.6 Alarm History.......................................................................................................... 1757.6.6.1 Alarm History Column Headings.................................................................... 1757.6.6.2 Viewing Additional Active Alarm Information ................................................. 176

7.7 Areas Region................................................................................................................... 1767.7.1 Areas Board ........................................................................................................... 176

7.7.1.1 Viewing Associated Alarm Area Information ................................................. 1767.7.1.2 Viewing Additional Alarm Area Information ................................................... 176

7.7.2 Issuing Commands to Areas.................................................................................. 1777.7.2.1 Toolbar........................................................................................................... 1777.7.2.2 Areas Menu.................................................................................................... 1777.7.2.3 Context Menu................................................................................................. 1777.7.2.4 Areas Commands .......................................................................................... 177

7.8 Alarm Board Region ........................................................................................................ 1787.8.1 Alarm Board ........................................................................................................... 178

7.8.1.1 Alarm Viewer Icons........................................................................................ 1787.8.1.2 Alarm Area / Alarm Point Icon States ............................................................ 1797.8.1.3 Viewing Additional Alarm Point Information................................................... 180

7.8.2 Issuing Commands to Alarm Points....................................................................... 1807.8.2.1 General commands ....................................................................................... 1807.8.2.2 Door only commands..................................................................................... 1807.8.2.3 Toolbar........................................................................................................... 1807.8.2.4 Alarm Board Menu......................................................................................... 1807.8.2.5 Context Menu................................................................................................. 1807.8.2.6 Alarm Input Commands ................................................................................. 181

7.9 Map Region ..................................................................................................................... 1817.9.1 Multi-Page Maps .................................................................................................... 1817.9.2 Viewing Alarms ...................................................................................................... 1817.9.3 Viewing the Map..................................................................................................... 1817.9.4 Issuing Commands to Areas, Alarm Points and Outputs ...................................... 181

7.10 CCTV Region ................................................................................................................ 1827.10.1 Expanding Video Sources.................................................................................... 1827.10.2 Panning, Tilting and Enlarging............................................................................. 1827.10.3 CCTV Archive Tools ............................................................................................ 183

7.11 If an Alarm Occurs......................................................................................................... 1847.11.1 When an alarm occurs.... ..................................................................................... 1847.11.2 What to do if an alarm occurs.... .......................................................................... 1847.11.3 How to stop (clear) an alarm................................................................................ 1847.11.4 What to do after an alarm... ................................................................................. 184

8. Event Facilities .................................................................................................................... 1858.1 Event Log ........................................................................................................................ 1858.2 Alarm Events ................................................................................................................... 1878.3 Alarm Alerts ..................................................................................................................... 1908.4 Event Archive .................................................................................................................. 1918.5 Event Archive Restore..................................................................................................... 1938.6 Event to Action ................................................................................................................ 194

8.6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................ 1948.6.2 Event to Action Details........................................................................................... 1948.6.3 Event to Action Configuration ................................................................................ 1948.6.4 Configure Send Email ............................................................................................ 195

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 xiv

8.7 Muster and Evacuation.................................................................................................... 1978.7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................ 1978.7.2 Specifying the Alarm Point for Muster ................................................................... 1978.7.3 Muster Details ........................................................................................................ 1998.7.4 Event to Action - 1.................................................................................................. 1998.7.5 Muster Configuration.............................................................................................. 2008.7.6 Event to Action Configuration - 2 ........................................................................... 2028.7.7 Muster Operation ................................................................................................... 203

9. Other Facilities .................................................................................................................... 2049.1 Modems........................................................................................................................... 2049.2 Modem Initialization String .............................................................................................. 2059.3 Database Backup............................................................................................................ 2059.4 Import .............................................................................................................................. 2069.5 Upgrade License ............................................................................................................. 2079.6 Configure Peripherals ..................................................................................................... 2089.7 Manage Controller Firmware........................................................................................... 2099.8 Change Password........................................................................................................... 2109.9 Search for a Keyholder.................................................................................................... 2119.10 Encode Keycode ........................................................................................................... 2119.11 Configure Organisations ............................................................................................... 215

9.11.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 2159.11.2 Multiple Organisation Units Details...................................................................... 215

9.11.2.1 License Upgrades........................................................................................ 2159.11.2.2 Log-in Screen............................................................................................... 2159.11.2.3 Tools Options............................................................................................... 2169.11.2.4 Edit, Add or Delete Org Units ...................................................................... 2169.11.2.5 Guests.......................................................................................................... 2189.11.2.6 Operators ..................................................................................................... 2199.11.2.7 Reports ........................................................................................................ 2199.11.2.8 Alarm Viewer................................................................................................ 2199.11.2.9 Database Back-Up, Archive and Restore.................................................... 220

9.11.3 Multiple Organisation Units Configuration ........................................................... 2209.11.3.1 User Interface .............................................................................................. 2209.11.3.2 Hardware ..................................................................................................... 220

9.11.4 Multiple Organisation Units Configure Actions .................................................... 2209.11.4.1 Configuring Org Units .................................................................................. 2209.11.4.2 Login ............................................................................................................ 2209.11.4.3 Operator Property Page............................................................................... 2219.11.4.4 Event Log Viewer......................................................................................... 2219.11.4.5 Guests.......................................................................................................... 2219.11.4.6 Hardware ..................................................................................................... 2219.11.4.7 Alarm Viewer................................................................................................ 2219.11.4.8 Miscellaneous .............................................................................................. 222

9.12 Audit Trail ...................................................................................................................... 22310. Error Messages ................................................................................................................. 224

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 xv

GlossaryAccess ControllerAn access controller determines when a door is unlocked depending on the key code receivedfrom a reader or Request to Exit switch. The type of controller determines how many doors itcan control (e.g. the 512 can control 2 doors using up to 4 readers).

Access GroupAn access group is a list of areas to which a keyholder is allowed access. The access may berestricted to certain times by use of a time profile.

AirlockAn airlock is an area controlled by two doors and if one door is open the other cannot beopened even with a valid key. Closing the first door, allows the second door to be opened with avalid key.

Alarm CategoryAn alarm category is a group of alarms defined by a privileged user. Each alarm category hasits own icon and alarm sound.

Anti-PassbackAnti-passback prevents a key being shared. Sharing occurs, for example, when one keyholderaccesses an area and then either holds the door open or passes the key back so that otherscan gain entry. When anti-passback is applied to an area, a key that has been used to enter thearea cannot be used to enter the area again until it has been used to exit the area. If passbackis transgressed, it can be reset for the keyholder by an operator with the appropriate privilege;also a timed reset and/or tailgate reset can be specified for the area.

Alarm PointAn alarm point is an input that generates an alarm when in a specified state (e.g. an input froma door may indicate that the door has been forced open).

AlarmAn alarm is an event that requires attention (e.g. a door forced open alarm).

AreaAn area has at least one door. The outside is counted as an area because it has a door forentering/leaving a building.

Buddy ReaderA buddy reader requires two keys to open the door (i.e. two keyholders are required beforeentry into an area is allowed).

Bolted DoorA bolted door on a 512 access controller prevents access to all keyholders except those withbolt door keyholder privilege.

A bolted door on a PAC 1100/2100/2200 series door controller prevents any time profileassigned to the door from unlocking the door.

ChannelA channel is connection between two items of hardware (see direct channel, door channel, PCchannel, RS-485 channel, and TCP/IP channel).

ControllerSee access controller, input controller and output controller.Diagnostic CodeA 2-byte hexadecimal number that can be mapped to one or more diagnostic messages. 0indicates that no diagnostic conditions exist.

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 xvi

DoorA door allows or prevents access in and out of an area. Doors may have a reader on each sideto allow access to be controlled in both in and out directions. Other doors may have a reader onone side and a Request to Exit switch on the other so that a key is not required to leave thearea.

Direct channelA direct channel is the connection between controllers and a PC via an RS-232 connection. TheRS-232 connection is usually via an administration kit.

Door ChannelA door channel is the connection between a door and a controller. The 512 has two doorchannels because it can control two doors. Each door channel can have two readers (in andout) or one reader and a Request to Exit switch connected to it.

Door ContactA door contact is a device, usually a magnetic switch, that may be installed on a door to monitorwhether the door is open or closed.

EventAn event is a transaction (does not require attention) or alarm (requires attention) that occurs onthe system. All events are logged by the system. The type of event determines how it isreported to the operator.

Exit/Entry Out of HoursExit/entry out of hours is a facility that prevents a person being trapped, e.g. a keyholder withlimited time only (controlled by a time profile) enters an area with an in and out reader and staystoo long. The keyholder can still exit but an alarm will be generated.

Fail Full SecureFail full secure is a communications failure mode that does not allows entry and exit into anarea. Bolted doors remain bolted.

Fail SafeFail safe is a communications failure mode that allows entry and exit into an area for prioritykeyholders and valid keyholders that have used their key to enter or exit the area. Bolted doorsare unbolted.

Fail SecureFail secure is a communications failure mode that allows entry and exit into an area for prioritykeyholders only. Bolted doors remain bolted.

Fail-Safe LockA fail-safe lock (or 'power to lock') requires a permanent power supply to keep the door locked,i.e. in the event of power failure the door would become unlocked.

Fail-Secure LockA fail-secure lock (or 'power to unlock') requires power to unlock the door. These can bedangerous in the event of emergencies such as fires. Always consult Heath and Safetypersonnel before fitting a fail-secure lock.

Full Arm AreaA full arm area is an area where all alarm points in the area are armed (i.e. all keys are deniedaccess).

Holiday PeriodA holiday period consists of a start and end date. A number of holiday periods are assigned to aholiday profile which can then be included in a time/mode profile to limit access during holidayperiods.

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 xvii

Holiday ProfileA holiday profile can be included in a time/mode profile to limit access during holiday periods. Aholiday profile consists of one or more holiday periods that can span multiple days.

InputAn input is a digital state that is effected by certain conditions (e.g. an input from a door mayhave a state 0 to indicate unlocked and a state 1 to indicate locked).

Input ControllerAn input controller provides end-of-line inputs that can be used to monitor certain conditions(e.g. a normally closed input could generate an alarm if it went open).

KeyA key is a token, fob or card that when presented to a reader will unlock the door. The key mustbe valid (i.e. known to the system, allow access to the area and not be presented outside apermitted time profile).

KeyholderA keyholder is a person who has a key. This could be a member of staff or a visitor. The keyallocated to the keyholder will only be valid for specified areas and times (e.g. visitors can beprevented from entering an area at any time and all areas after a certain date).

Mode ProfileA mode profile can be applied to an area, door or reader to determine its mode (e.g. door locked orunlocked). A holiday profile can be assigned to a mode profile to limit access during holiday periods.

Offline ControllerAn offline controller is not permanently connected to a PC but can be programmed and updated by apersonal digital assistant (PDA) or laptop computer that is connected when required.

Online ControllerAn online controller is permanently connected to a PC and is automatically updated when changes aremade via the administration software.

Omitted AlarmAn omitted alarm point is an alarm point that is not armed when its associated area is armedand therefore allows the area to be armed even when the alarm point is in alarm (i.e. the areasaid to be partially armed). An alarm point can be flagged as Always Armed, meaning it cannotbe omitted and therefore must be reset and acknowledged before the associated area can bearmed.

OperatorAn operator is a keyholder who is allowed to make changes to the database determined by theoperator privileges, e.g. a receptionist can add keyholders but not controllers.

OutputAn output is a digital state that controls certain conditions (e.g. an output from a controller mayhave a state of 0 to unlock a door and state 1 to lock a door).

Output ControllerAn output controller provides relay outputs that can be used to control certain conditions (e.g. asiren could be activated if an alarm condition is detected).

Passive Infra RedA Passive Infra Red (PIR) detector acts as a Request to Exit switch but no contact is requiredas the door opens automatically when someone approaches it.

PC ChannelA PC channel is the connection between a controller and a PC.

PIN ReaderA PIN reader is a special type of reader which requires a 4-digit personal identification number

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 xviii

to be entered in conjunction with a valid key.

Priority KeyholdersPriority keyholders are stored on the appropriate access controller and are therefore allowed toenter and exit an associated area even if there is a communications failure between the serverand controllers (providing that the communications failure mode has not been set to Fail FullSecure).

ReaderA reader sends a key code to a controller when a key is presented to it. If the key is valid, anunlock door signal is sent to the door lock.

Request to Exit SwitchA Request to Exit switch is a switch (or button) that unlocks a door when pressed. A valid key isnot required so anyone can leave the area.

RS-485 ChannelA RS-485 channel is the connection between a server and controllers (or between controllerson a direct channel).

Security LevelA security level (range 0 to 9) can be assigned to a key to determine which doors it can open orareas it can access. A door or area is also assigned a security level and the security level of thekey must be equal or greater than the security level of the door or area to allow access.However, if the security level of the door or area is 0, no access is allowed at any time by anykey.

Stay Arm AreaA stay arm area is an area that can still be accessed by keys but selective alarm points withinthe area are armed (e.g. doors on the perimeter of the alarm area).

Tamper EventAn alarm generated when a controller case is tampered with (e.g. broken in to).

TCP/IP ChannelA TCP/IP channel can be a 500 TCP/IP channel (i.e. the Ethernet connection between a PCand a server) or a Direct TCP/IP channel (i.e. the Ethernet connection between a PC and anaccess or door controller).

Time PeriodA time period consists of a start time, end time, and one or more days. A number of timeperiods are assigned to a time profile which defines when a keyholder can access an area.

Time ProfileA time profile can be applied to a door, keyholder or access group to only allow access duringcertain times (e.g. only during office hours). A time profile consists of one or more time periodsthat can span multiple days. A holiday profile can be assigned to a time profile to limit accessduring holiday periods.

TransactionA transaction is an event that does not require attention (e.g. a valid keyholder opening a door).

Introduction to Help File

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 1

1. Introduction to Help File1.1 Displaying Help InformationTo display Administration Software help information:

• Select Help > Contents.To display context-sensitive help information:

• Select an area on the Administration Software window and press F1 on the keyboard.

To display the 500 series help information:

• Select Start > Programs > Administration Software Tools > 500 Series Manual

1.2 Tab Area Facilities

To navigate the help information:

• Select the Contents tab and an item in the contents list.

or

• Select the Index tab, enter a keyword, and select an item in the index list.

or

• Select the Search tab, enter a keyword, and select an item in the search list.

or

• Select the Favorites tab and double click an item in the favourites list.

or

• Select an in-text link (indicated by blue text).

To add items to the favourites list:

• Navigate to the required help information, select the Favorites tab, and select Add.

To remove items from the favourites list:

• Select the Favorites tab, select the item in the favourites list, and select Remove.

To display glossary definitions:

• Select the Glossary tab and select an item in the glossary list.

or

• Select an in-text glossary item (indicated by red text); to close the definition, select theglossary item again.

1.3 Toolbar Facilities

To hide/show the tab area:

• Select the Hide icon and the tab area is closed and the icon changes to Show; to redisplaythe tab area select the Show icon.

To move backwards and forwards in displayed order:

• Select the Back or Forward icon

Introduction to Help File

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 2

To display the home page:

• Select the Home icon.

To print a topic:

• Select the Print icon and if no subtopics are displayed in the Contents tab, the Printwindow (that allows a printer to be selected) is displayed.

• Select the Print icon and If subtopics are displayed in the Contents tab, the Print Topicswindow (that gives the option to display all the subtopics) is displayed before the Printwindow.

1.4 Browse Facilities

To move backwards and forwards in table-of-contents order:

• Select the Previous or Next icon.

To display the home page of a main section:

• Select the section name in the drop-down menu.

To display a certain item:

• Locate the item in the Browse area using the left and right arrows and select the item.

See Tab Area Facilities and Toolbar Facilities.

Specifications

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 3

2. Specifications2.1 Administration Software Specifications2.1.1 System Limits

indicates included

indicates optional via license

Features SecureNet SecureNetSE

SecureNetPro

System Limits

Doors 20 100 1000

Keyholders 1000 10,000 75,000

Operators 10 10 50

Time/Mode Profiles (4000 periods across all profiles) 20 100 200

Holiday Profiles (20 periods each) 2 10 10

Access Groups (132 areas each) 20 2000 5000

Areas 1000 1000 1000

Organisational Unit 1 1 1

500 TCP/IP Channels 100 100

512 TCP/IP Channels unlimited unlimited unlimited

Direct Channels 2 2 10

Dialup Channels 2 2 10

Offline Channels unlimited unlimited unlimited

Controllers on a RS-485 channel on 500 channel 24 24 24Controllers on direct channel 32 32 32If using GSM modems 16 16 16

Event Storage depends ondisc space

depends ondisc space

depends ondisc space

Alarm Workstations 1 1 2

Client PCs 2 5

System Limits Upgrades Maximum Limits

5000 Keyholders 75,000 75,000 75,000

50 Doors 1000 1000 1000

10 Doors 1000 1000 1000

500 Access Groups 5000 5000 5000

2 x 500 Channels 100 N/A N/A

50 Dialup Channels 250 250 250

10 Dialup Channels 250 250 250

2 Dialup Channels 250 250 250

10 x 1100/2100/2200 Controllers 250 250 250

10 Operators 100 100 100

Specifications

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 4

1 Organisational Unit 25 25 25

1 Alarm Workstation 8 8 8

Client PCs 15 15 15

2.1.2 Administration Features indicates included

indicates optional via license

Features SecureNet SecureNetSE

SecureNetPro

Keyholder Pictures

Start and End Dates for Keyholders

Block Change of Keyholders

Photo Identification

Card Designer

Area Administration

Remote Lock Activation

Door Mode Profiles

Reader Mode Profiles

Online Event Log

Online Context Sensitive Help

Backup and Restore

Firmware Updates from PC

Export to PDF, ODBC, Excel, etc

Automatic Daylight Saving Changeover

Alarm Management

Event Archiving and Restore

Audit Trail

CCTV

DVR

Area Management (with mode profiles)

Event to Action

Muster and Evacuation

Lift Control

Card Formats

PAC 1100/2100/2200 Support

Specifications

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 5

2.2 Hardware Specifications2.2.1 500 SpecificationsSystem LimitsMaximum number of controllers on each RS-485 channel: 24

Maximum distance between the server and controller ona network:

1500ft/500m alarm cable or3000ft/1000m CAT5 cable

Number of RS-485 channels: 2

Number of RS-232 channels: 1

Maximum number of doors served: 128

Maximum number of keyholders served: 75,000

Maximum number of events in memory buffer: 10,000

Maximum number of access groups served: 5000

Maximum number of time profiles served: 200

Maximum number of system holidays served: 20

PowerPower supply: 10.5 to 14V dc (use an isolated PSU with backup battery)

Lithium battery:

(for real-timeclock)

Non-replaceable:

Life expectancy 20 years @ 25°C/75°Fwhen unit not powered

Environment

Temperature: -10 to 55°C/14 to 130°F

Humidity: 0 to 90% RH (non-condensing)

FacilitiesOne-Touch™ installation testing.

High speed network communications.

Built in TCP/IP & Ethernet support.

Plug-n-play network management.

Global anti-passback across all controllers connected to the 500 access and alarm server

Alarm integration.

Encrypted Communications.

PSTN connectivity via external modem.

Alarm dial-back.

Downloadable firmware into FLASH™ Memory.

Specifications

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 6

2.2.2 512 SpecificationsSystem LimitsMaximum number of doors per controller: 2

Maximum number of PAC/KeyPAC readers percontroller:

4

Maximum number of Wiegand or Magstripe readers percontroller:

2

Maximum distance between the first controller and lastcontroller on a network:

1500ft/500m alarm cable or3000ft/1000m CAT5 cable

Maximum distance between controllers: 1500ft/500m alarm cable or3000ft/1000m CAT5 cable

Maximum distance between controller and reader: see below

Maximum number of keys: 10,000 see Note 1

Maximum number of events in memory buffer: 4000

Maximum number of access groups: 5000Notes

1. The maximum number of keys is reduced if any keyholders have more than one accessgroup/personal access assigned.

2. Other system limits (e.g. number of controllers per system) depend on theadministration software being used.

Controller to Reader DistancesThe following table gives the recommended maximum distance between a reader and controllerassuming 24AWG/0.22mm2 unshielded cable is used and allows for 11V battery power.Note

The figures below are for readers powered from the controller. The cable distances canbe increased to 1650ft/500m by locally powering the readers.

Maximum RecommendedDistance from Controller

Type of Reader

Feet Metres

PAC Low Profile, Panel Mount and Vandal Resistant 230 70

PAC Standard Plus, Slimline and Standard Plus VandalResistant

825 250

KeyPAC Medium Range, Slimline and Vandal Resistant 825 250

DualTech Reader 230 70

PIN Reader 66 20

Wiegand and Magstripe Readers Depends on the type ofreader, see manufacturer's

documentation

PowerPower supply: 10.5 to 14V dc (it is recommended to use an isolated PSU with backup

battery)

Lithium battery: Type CR2450:

Life expectancy 3 years @ 25°C/75°F when unit not powered

Life expectancy 10 years @ 25°C/75°F when unit powered

Specifications

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 7

Environment

Temperature: -10 to 55°C/14 to 130°F

Humidity: 0 to 90% RH (non-condensing)

FacilitiesOne-Touch™ installation testing.

High speed network communications.

Plug-n-play network management.

Downloadable firmware into FLASH™ Memory.

2.2.3 520/530 I/O ControllersSystem Limits

PAC 520 PAC 530Maximum number of inputs: 20 2

Maximum number of low power outputs: 2 10

Maximum number of high power outputs: 0 2

Number of RS-485 channels: 1 1

PowerPower supply: 10.5 to 14V dc (it is recommended to use an isolated PSU with backup

battery)

Environment

Temperature: -10 to 55°C/14 to 130°F

Humidity: 0 to 90% RH (non-condensing)

FacilitiesOne-Touch™ installation testing.

High speed network communications.

Downloadable firmware into FLASH™ Memory.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 8

3. Administration Software3.1.1 Introduction to the Administration SoftwareThe Administration Software is a PC-based administrative software package for access controlsystems.

To obtain information on the following tasks:

• Select the appropriate icon. The tasks are listed in the recommended order for creating anaccess control system but editing can be performed in any order, see the Simple Examplesection.

Logon (from Windows desktop)

Customise company name, module names, categories, keyholder information, andaccess options.

Customise the list view and alter its appearance.

Add/update/delete areas (only in Access by Areas mode, see Access Type section).

Start/stop the Administration Software engines (engines should be running).

Add/update/delete a channels

Add/update/delete a controllers.

Probe/configure/unconfigure controllers.

Add/update/delete a holiday profiles.

Add/update/delete a time profiles.

Add/update/delete a doors.

Add/update/delete an access group (only in Access by Access Group mode, seeAccess Type section).

Add/update/delete a keyholders.

Add/update/delete an operators.

Configure video sources (a license is required for this facility).

Download database to the controllers.

Logoff.

3.1.2 InstallationThe Administration Software is provided on CD. When the CD is placed in the CD drive of thePC the following options are available.

The Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine (MSDE) must be installed on your PC beforeAdministration Software. If it is not, the opportunity to install it is displayed before theAdministration Software options are displayed.

1. Start the Administration Software installation program. If selected, the following optionsare displayed:

• Activate the Windows 2000 Service Pack 3 installation program (only displayed if yourWindows 2000 operating system does not have Service Pack 3 or above installed).

• Activate DotNet framework V1.1 (greyed out if already installed).

• Install windows Message Queuing (greyed out if already installed).

• Install MSDE database (greyed out if already installed).

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 9

• Install Crystal Reports 11 (greyed out if already installed).

• Install Microsoft Web Service Extensions (WSE, greyed out if already installed).

• Start Installation.

2. Install the Administration Software Client only.

3. View the release notes.

4. Display help files.

Make a note of any existing license keys. If the Administration Software is upgraded andre-installed, the license keys must be re-entered.

Notes1. Installation can only be performed by an Operating System Administrator and should be

performed by the local administrator.

2. The options can also be displayed by running Setup.exe provided on the CD.

3. Before installing, ensure that File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks is enabled.

4. The software is installed with access controlled by areas and access groups.

5. The software is installed in demonstration mode which allows the database to bespecified but the controllers cannot be configured until a valid license key has beenspecified.

6. If upgrading administration software, new license keys will be required.

To ensure File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks is enabled:1. Select Start > Settings > Control Panel and the Control Panel window is displayed.

2. Select Network Connections and the Network Connections window is displayed.

3. Right click on the connection and select Properties.

4. Ensure that the File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks checkbox is selected.

5. Select OK.

6. It may be necessary to start the 'Server' service.

To start the 'Server' service:1. Select Start > Run and the Run window is displayed.

2. Enter cmd and select OK.

3. Enter net start and a list of services that have started is displayed.

4. If 'Server' has not started, enter net start server.

3.1.3 UpdatesThe existing software can be updated by upgrading the license agreement (see the UpgradeLicense section) or updating the software (see the Installation section).

There is an option when updating the software to retain the existing database. Alternatively, adatabase that has been saved using the Database Backup facility can be restored (see theRestore Database section) or a for Windows or Vision database can be imported (see theImport section).

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 10

3.2 Access Control Overview3.2.1 System Design3.2.1.1 Access Types

The administration software may provide the following access types options:Areas and access groups Each keyholder is assigned to access groups that allow access to certain

areas. For example, used in systems where there is more than one doorinto most areas and a large number of areas that require groupingaccording to who has access.

Areas and security levels Each keyholder and area are assigned a security level which determineswhich areas each keyholder can access. For example, used in systemswhere there is more than one door into most areas and a small numberof areas.

Doors and access groups Keyholders are assigned to access groups that allow access to certaindoors. For example, used in systems where there is only one door intoeach area and a large number of areas that require grouping accordingto who has access.

Doors and security levels Each keyholder and door are assigned a security level which determineswhich doors each keyholder can open. For example, used in systemswhere there is only one door into each area and a small number ofareas.

The access type required is specified at installation but can be changed using customisation.

It is recommended to take a backup of the system before changing access type becauseinformation could be lost (e.g. access groups and areas).

3.2.1.2 System Design

When designing an access control system, it is necessary to plan the requirements of thesystem. This includes deciding how many areas, doors, keyholders, etc. are needed withconsideration given to possible modification and expansion.

To help you plan your access control system, an example and glossary is given below andadvice given in the following sections. You should aim to have a similar map of your site beforeyou specify, install or commission your system. A simple example to get you started is given inthe Simple Example section.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 11

Access ControllerAn access controller determines when a door is unlocked depending on the key code receivedfrom a reader or Request to Exit switch. The type of door controller determines how manydoors it can control (e.g. the 512 can control 2 doors using up to 4 readers). The examplerequires seven 512 controllers.

AreaAn area has at least one door. The example has 9 areas (the outside is counted as an area).

DoorA door allows or prevents access in and out of an area. The example has 13 doors. Severaldoors have a reader on each side to allow access to be controlled in both in and out directions.Other doors have a Request to Exit switch that allows anyone to leave the area.

Door ChannelA door channel is the connection between a door and a controller. The 512 has two doorchannels because it can control two doors. Each door channel can have two readers (in andout) or one reader and a Request to Exit switch connected to it. The door channels arespecified as described in the Door Configuration section.

KeyA key is a token, fob or card that when presented to a reader will unlock the door. The key mustbe valid (i.e. known to the system, allow access to the area and not presented outside apermitted time profile).

KeyholderA keyholder is a person who has a key. This could be a member of staff or a visitor. The keyallocated to the keyholder will only be valid for specified areas and times (e.g. visitors can beprevented from entering the Development area at any time and all areas after a certain date).

ReaderA reader sends a key code to a controller when a key is presented to it. If the key is valid, anunlock door signal is sent to the door lock.

Request to Exit SwitchA Request to Exit switch is a switch (or button) that unlocks a door when pressed. A valid keyis not required so anyone can leave an area.

Time ProfileA time profile can be applied to a door, keyholder or access group to only allow access duringcertain times (e.g. only during office hours).

3.2.1.3 System Plan

The example given in the System Design section requires the following information to plan theaccess control system. The example uses seven 512 access controllers (see HardwareConfiguration using 500 Channel section and Hardware Configuration using OfflineChannel section). Each access controller can control two doors.

Doors

Door Controller Door Channel Reader/RTE

Outside/Reception 1 1 In readerOut reader

Reception/Accounts 1 2 In readerRequest to Exit

Reception/Technical Support 2 1 In readerRequest to Exit

Reception/Development 2 2 In readerRequest to Exit

Reception/Corridor 3 1 In readerRequest to Exit

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 12

Reception/Sales 3 2 In readerRequest to Exit

Accounts/Technical Support 4 1 In readerOut reader

TechnicalSupport/Development

4 2 In readerOut reader

Development/Stores 5 1 In readerOut reader

Stores/Corridor 5 2 In readerRequest to Exit

Canteen/Corridor 6 1 In readerRequest to Exit

Corridor/Outside 6 2 In readerOut reader

Corridor/Sales 7 1 In readerRequest to Exit

Spare 7 2 Not used

The example uses the following access information:

Holiday ProfilesShutdown Periods

Time ProfilesNo Access, Access at all times, Long Day, Office hours, Evening, and Night Shift.

Access GroupsAccountants, Canteen Staff, Cleaners, Development Team, Sales Team, Security, Stores, andTechnical Support.

3.2.1.4 Hardware Configuration using 500 Channel

The example shows how the controllers described in the System Plan section can beconnected:

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 13

3.2.1.5 Hardware Configuration using Offline Channel

The example shows how the controllers described in the System Plan section can beconnected if using an offline channel.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 14

3.2.2 Simple Example3.2.2.1 Introduction

This example demonstrates how a simple access control system can be configured andadministrated using Administration Software. It is recommended that the context-sensitive help(accessed by pressing F1) is used throughout the example to discover more information (e.g.how to customise the views and the use of right click).Note

Although this is a simple example, access is defined by areas and access groups (seethe Access Types section) to demonstrate how a more complex system would bedefined. It can be used as a starting point and then modified for an actual system.

Perform the following tasks in the following order:Define the areas

Add the 500 TCP/IP channel

Add/probe the controller

Define the holiday profiles

Define the time profiles

Update the doors

Define access groups

Add Keyholders

Add Operators

The system can then be edited in any order to configure your own system.3.2.2.2 Define the Areas

This example has 3 areas (outside, reception and sales). Outside is automatically created.

1. Select Area in Explorer bar.

2. Select New in Property Page.

3. Enter the Name (i.e. Reception).

4. Enter the Description (i.e. Access to/from Outside and Sales).

NoteDoor access to areas is automatically entered when the doors have been defined.

5. Select Add on the Property Page.

Repeat for the sales area.

Now define the 500 TCP/IP channel.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 15

3.2.3 Add the 500 TCP/IP channelFor this example, only one 500 server is required.

For this example, only one 500 server is required. The 500 is connected to the TCP/IP channel.

1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.

2. Select New and Create New 500 on the Property Page.

3. Enter the Name (e.g. 500 TCP/IP channel).

4. Select Protocol Type (e.g. TCP/IP via permanent connection).

5. Select the computer name (e.g. PCNAME).

6. Enter the 500 URL (e.g. http://192.168.31.14) or select the 500 Probe button.

7. Select the Areas tab and select all the areas.

8. Select Add on the Property Page.

9. Wait for the communications to be established.

Now add and probe the controller.

3.2.3.1 Add and Probe the Controller

For this example, only one 512 is required. The reception door has an in and out reader and thesales door has an in reader and a Request to Exit switch.

To add the 512 controller:1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.

2. Select New and Create New Controller on the Property Page.

3. Enter the Name (i.e. Controller 1).

4. Enter the Description (i.e. Reception and Sales).

5. Select Type (i.e. 512).

6. Select 500 (i.e. 500 TCP/IP channel).

7. Select Add on the Property Page.

To probe the 512 controller:

1. Select Hardware > Probe Channels or the icon. The physical connections are probedand 512 controllers are connected, the serial number of 512 is displayed.

2. Drag the controller from the list on the right on to the serial number on the left.

3. Select the option to download to the controller and OK.

Now define the holiday profiles.

3.2.3.2 Define the Holiday Profiles

1. Select Holiday in the Explore bar.

2. Select New on the Property Page.

3. Enter the Name (i.e. Shutdown Periods).

4. Enter the Description (i.e. Bank Holidays and Works Shutdown).

5. Add a holiday:

• Select Add Holiday on the Property Page.

• Enter the name of the holiday (e.g. Christmas).

• Select the start date and time from the drop-down calendar.

• Select the end date and time from the drop-down calendar.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 16

6. Repeat Step 5 for each shutdown period.

7. Select Add on the Property Page.

Repeat if another holiday profile is required.

Now define the time profiles.

3.2.3.3 Define the Time/Mode ProfilesNote

If PAC 1100/2100/2200 controllers are being used, the time profiles must be defined afterthe controllers and the time profile property page is different from the time profile propertypage displayed for 512 only systems. PAC 1100/2100/2200 controllers use daily timeprofiles and 512 controllers use weekly time profiles but if any PAC 1100/2100/2200controllers are used, both types of controller use daily time profiles.

To add time/mode profiles:1. Select Time & Mode Profile in the Explorer bar.

2. Select New and Create New Time Profile, Create New Door Profile or Create NewReader Profile on the Property Page.

3. Enter the Name (i.e. Office Hours).

4. Enter the Description (i.e. 09:00 to 17:00 Weekdays).

5. If specifying a mode profile, select the Mode.

6. Specify the active period for each day:

• Click on a day to create a new time period and drag the created time bar.

• The period start and end can be fine tuned by using the From and To increment boxes(e.g. Monday 09:00 to Monday 17:00).

• The time period can be copied to another day by pressing and holding the Ctrl key,selecting a time period and dragging it to another day while continuing to hold the Ctrlkey.

• The time period can also be copied by right clicking on a time period, selecting Copy,right clicking on another day and selecting Paste.

• Repeat for each day.

7. Specify the active periods for a holiday:

• Select the Holiday tab.

• Select the holiday profile (e.g. Bank Holidays)

• Click on the holiday bar to create a new time period and drag the created time bar.

• Fine-tune the time using the From and To increment boxes (e.g. 09:00 to 17:00).

To add daily time profiles:1. Select Time Profile in the Explorer bar.

2. Select New on the Property Page.

3. Enter the Name (i.e. Office Hours).

4. Enter the Description (i.e. 09:00 to 17:00 Weekdays).

5. Specify the active times for each day:

• Select the Period 1 check box.

• Specify the Start Time.

• Specify the End Time.

• Select the day check boxes for each day the time period applies to.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 17

• Repeat for other time periods (e.g. weekends may be different to week days).

6. Specify whether the time period applies during a holiday period (if the No Holiday Periodradio button is selected, the time profile applies during holidays).

7. Select Add on the Property Page.

Repeat if other time profiles are required.

Now update the doors.

3.2.3.4 Update the Doors

This example has 2 doors: the reception door has an in and out reader and the sales door hasan in reader and a Request to Exit switch.

Reception door:1. Select Doors in the Explorer bar.

2. Select the reception door (e.g. Controller 1 Door 1).

3. Edit the Name (i.e. Reception door).

4. Enter the Description (i.e. Outside/Reception).

5. Select the Configuration tab and ensure the settings are correct.

6. Select the Access tab.

7. Select Reader Type.

8. Define SIG A for reception door:

• Select the area to access from drop-down menu (i.e. Outside).

• Select Reader connected radio button.

9. Define SIG B for reception door:

• Select the area to access from drop-down menu (i.e. Reception).

• Select Reader connected radio button.

10. Select area to access from drop-down menu (i.e. Reception).

11. Select Update on the Property Page.

Sales door:1. Select the sales door (e.g. Controller 1 Door 2).

1. Edit the Name (i.e. Sales door).

2. Enter the Description (i.e. Sales/Reception).

3. Select the Configuration tab and ensure the settings are correct (e.g. reader).

4. Select the Access tab.

5. Define SIG A for reception door:

• Select the area to access from drop-down menu (i.e. Sales).

• Select Reader connected radio button.

6. Define SIG B for reception door:

• Select the No reader connected radio button (Request to Exit switch is used to exitSales).

7. Select Update on the Property Page.

Now define the access groups.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 18

3.2.3.5 Define Access Groups

1. Select Access Group in the Explorer bar.

2. Select New on the Property Page.

3. Enter the Name (i.e. Sales Team).

4. Enter the Description (i.e. Sales Personnel).

5. Select the Access Groups tab.

6. Select Profile 1 check box.

7. Select a time profile from the drop-down menu (i.e. Office Hours).

8. Select the check boxes next to each area that can be accessed by this group.

9. Select Add on the Property Page.

Repeat if other access groups are required.

Now add keyholders.

3.2.3.6 Add Keyholders

1. Select Keyholder in the Explorer bar.

2. Select New on the Property Page.

3. Enter the details and photo.

4. Select Details tab and fill in the details. In most cases, the End Date check box should notbe selected, because the end date is not known.

5. Select the Notes tab and enter appropriate text (e.g. any disability that might require longerdoor open time).

6. Select the Keys tab and present a key to the administration reader.

7. If required, select the Set PIN button and specify a PIN to be used with offline locks.

8. Select the Extra Information tab and enter the details (only available if extra fields havebeen specified, see Customisation section).

9. Select the Personal Access tab and define areas the keyholder can access:

• Select the Profile 1 check box.

• Select the time profile from the drop-down list. Selecting 'No Time Profile' will allowaccess to the selected areas at all times.

• Specify the areas the time profile applies to by selecting/deselecting the area checkboxes.

• If required, repeat for Profile 2.

10. Select the Access Groups tab and select the access group(s) that keyholder belongs to.

11. Select Add on the Property Page.

12. Select the Events tab, present the key to the readers and check that the events arereported and access is allowed/disallowed depending on keys access rights.

Repeat for other keyholders.

Now add operators.

3.2.3.7 Add Operators

1. Select Operator in the Explorer bar.

2. Select New on the Property Page.

3. Enter the Login Name (e.g. Supervisor).

4. Select Set Password and specify a password for the operator.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 19

5. Select the keyholder who is to have operator privileges. A new keyholder can be specifiedby selecting Create New.

6. Specify other fields as required.

7. Select the Privileges tab and select the operator template that determines which facilitiesthe keyholder can access (see Operator Privileges section).

8. Select Add on the Property Page.

Repeat for any other operators.

Now download database to the controller.

3.2.3.8 Download Database to the Controller

1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.

2. Select a controller.

3. Select the Tasks button.

4. Select Download controller database.5. Select OK to confirm.

The simple example is now configured and can be used as a basis for an actual system.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 20

3.3 Administration Software Tools3.3.1 HelpTo display the administration software help file:

• Select Start > Programs > PAC SecureNet Tools > HelpFor context-sensitive help:

• Select an area on an administration software window and press F1 on the keyboard.

3.3.2 500 ManualTo display the 500 Series installation help file:

• Select Start > Programs > PAC SecureNet Tools > 500 Series Manual

3.3.3 Restore DatabaseNote

Restore can only be performed by an Operating System Administrator.

To restore an Administration Software database:1. Ensure that all users are logged off.

2. Select Start > Programs >Administration Software Tools >Restore Database and the Restorewindow is displayed.

3. Select a file using the browse facility.

4. Select the Restore button.

3.3.4 Release NotesTo display the release notes for the administration software:

• Select Start > Programs > PAC SecureNet Tools > Release Notes

3.3.5 Service ManagerNote

Starting and stopping an engine can only be performed by an Operating SystemAdministrator.

To start/stop an Engine:1. Select Start > Programs> PAC

SecureNet Tools > Service Manager or

double click the icon in the Windowstaskbar or Select which engines are to bestarted/stopped.

2. Select which engines are to bestarted/stopped.

3. Select the Start or Stop button.

Client EngineA client engine can be installed on a client PC to allow administration and monitoring from theclient PC. The client engine can be installed when installing the Administration Software on theclient PC or by selecting Tools > Configure Client Engine on the client PC.

The client engine can be unconfigured if no channels are defined by selecting Tools >Unconfigure Client Engine on the client PC.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 21

3.3.6 Application SoftwareTo logon to the administration software:

• Select Start > Programs > PAC SecureNet Tools > PAC SecureNetor

• Select the PAC SecureNet icon.

3.3.7 Configure Device IP AddressesIf a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server is not being used, a static IP address(allocated by the Network Administrator) must be configured for the 500, 512IP and/or PAC2200IP.

To configure a static IP address:1. Select Start > Programs> PAC

SecureNet Tools > Configure Device IPAddresses (via the Windows StartMenu) and the IP Device AddressConfiguration Utility window isdisplayed.

2. Select a 500, 512IP, or 2200IP tab.

3. Select a device.

4. Select Entry > Modify and the set IPParameters window is displayed.Note

If the 500 selected is locked, it mustbe unlocked by powering it up with theOne-Touch™ button pressed.

5. Obtain the IP address automatically orenter the IP Address, Subnet Mask andDefault Gateway.

6. Select OK.

MAC Address 1 The MAC address of the device (the unique identifier for the TCP/IPport).1 512IP and 2200IP only

Serial Number 2 The serial number of the device.2 500 and 512IP only

Auto IP An indication of whether the IP address has been automaticallyallocated (True) or not (False)

Locked 3 An indication of whether the IP address has been locked and cannotbe reset (True) or not (False).3 500 only

IP Address The IP address of the device.

Subnet Mask The subnet mask of the network.

Default Gateway 3 The IP address of the default gateway.3 500 only

Device Type 4 The device type.4 PAC 2200IP only

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 22

To refresh the window:

• Select File > RefreshTo exit the window:

• Select File > Exit or .

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 23

3.4 Administration Software Overview3.4.1 LoginTo login to the Access Control Administration Software:

1. Double click the Administration Software icon on the Windows desktop and the Logon/Exit window is displayed.

2. Select or enter an operator name and password. The operator privileges determine thefacilities that can be accessed (see Operator Privileges section).

3. If a key can be used (or is required) to log on, select the Key login checkbox and present avalid key to the administration reader.

4. If the system has multiple organisational units, select the Organisation.

5. The Options button can be used by users with Operating System Administrator privilegesto specify the server the client PC is connected to. The server should be inside theorganisation firewall.

When using 10BaseT cabling, a hub must be used to network PCs together. Do notsimply plug a CAT5 crossover cable between two PC network cards as this will proveunreliable.

5. Select Log on and the Administration Software window is displayed.Note

When logging on for the first time after installation, the Login Name must be Installer.Then select Log on and a password can be specified.

The following will be hidden in the help file and only accessed by Help on the errormessage.Only one instance of the Administration Software can be running at any one time so if anactivation of the Administration Software is attempted while another is already running an errormessage is displayed.

The Windows Task Manager can be used to end the task or the current task can be loggedout before attempting a re-activation.

To use the Windows Task Manager:1. Press Crtl+Shift+Esc.

2. Select the Administration Software program and End Task (to close the program) orSwitch to (to locate the program).

If a system alarm (or selected alarms not assigned to an area) are detected at login, a SystemAlarms window is displayed:.

To acknowledge the alarm(s), select the ClearAll button.

To update the alarm list, select the Refreshlist.

To prevent the window being displayed otherthan at login, select the Do not pop up thisdialog again (until next login) checkbox.

To close the window, select the Closewindow.

screenshot??

The window can also be displayed by selecting Tools > System Alarms (see Menus section).

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 24

3.4.2 Administration Software WindowAfter login, the Administration Software Window has a Welcome Screen, Menus, Toolbar,Explorer Bar, and Status Bar.The Welcome screen is replaced by the List View and Property Page when a module isselected in the Explorer bar. The Welcome screen can be redisplayed by selecting thecompany name. The company name is specified using the Customisation facilities.

The window can be maximised, minimised and resized and the List View, Explore Bar andProperty Page can be resized by dragging the edges.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 25

3.4.3 Welcome ScreenThe Welcome screen is displayed after the first login and when the company name is selectedin the Explorer bar. The Welcome screen displays information on the system (e.g. number ofkeyholders and maximum limits of the system). If the operator privileges allow, it also has a SetOrganisation Options link that allows the modules to be customised (see the Customisationsection).

To display the welcome screen:

• Select the company name in theExplorer bar.

To display the list view and property page:

• Select a module in the Explorer bar.

Further information on screen areas is given inthe Administration Software Windowsection.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 26

3.4.4 Menus

Normal Menu:

Hardware Menu:

Event Log Menu See Event Log section

The menu items that can be accessed depend on the operator privileges. The list below detailsall options available to an Installer.

FileLogoff Displays the Log on/Exit window.

Import Displays the File Import window.

Activate AlarmAlerts

Enables/Disables the Alarm Alert popups.

Preview ID Card Displays a previously-created photo ID card for the selectedkeyholder(s) which can then be printed (Keyholder List Viewonly).

Print ID Card Prints a previously-created photo ID card for the selectedkeyholder (Keyholder List View only).

Exit Exits immediately.

EditUpdate or AddCurrent Record

Saves a new record or updates an existing record.

Create a NewRecord

Creates a new record.

Delete CurrentRecord

Deletes the selected record.

Make Copy Record Copies the selected record. To paste the record, select Updateor Add Record.

Discard Changes toCurrent Record

Discards any changes since the last Update or Add operation.

These facilities are the same as those offered by the buttons on the Property Page.

ViewExplorer Bar Toggles the display of the Explorer bar.

Toolbar Displays toolbar submenu:

Standard Buttons Toggles the display of the toolbar.Show Text Toggles the display of icon names.

Large Icons Toggles the display of large icons.

Large Icons Displays the list with associated large icons (List View only).

Small Icons Displays the list with associated small icons (List View only).

Details Displays the list with extra information in columns (List Viewonly).

Thumbnails Displays the list with associated photos (Keyholder List Viewonly).

Tree View Displays the list with parent and subordinate areas (Area ListView only).

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 27

Choose Columns Specifies the columns to be displayed in the list view.

Back Selects the previously selected module.

Forward Selects the next module if Back has been used.

Keyholder DetailReport

Displays the keyholder detail report for the selected keyholder(Keyholder List View only).

Event Report Displays the keyholder event search parameters for selecting anevent report for the selected keyholder (Keyholder List Viewonly).

Show Details Displays information on the selected record in a separatewindow, e.g. time profile in access groups.

Navigate to Displays information on the selected record in a theAdministration Software window, e.g. time profile in accessgroups.

Refresh Updates the current display.

Keyholders (only on Keyholder module)

Anti-PassbackForgive

Forgives an anti-passback violation by the selected keyholder.

Encode Keycode Displays the Encode Keycode window (see the EncodeKeycode section).

Hardware (only on Hardware module)

Options when a 500 TCP/IP channel is selected:Reset Password Displays a warning message to consult the hardware

documentation (see the Manage Controller Firmware section).

Probe Channels Examines the communications channels to locate physicallyconnected controllers.

Download directchannels

Downloads the database to all controllers on selecteddirect/dialup channels.

Download offlinechannels

Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offlinechannels (see the Download Database to the Controllersusing the PDA section).

Download ChannelDatabase

Downloads the database of all controllers on the selected 500channel.

Synchronise allchannel clocks

Synchronises all clocks on the system with the clock on the PC.

FirmwareDownload

Displays the Manage Firmware window (see the ManageController Firmware section).

Only download firmware to one server or controllerat a time.

Modems Displays the Modems window (see the Modems section).

Options when a direct channel is selected:Probe Channels Examines the communications channels to locate physically

connected controllers.

Download directchannels

Downloads the database to all controllers on selecteddirect/dialup channels.

Download offlinechannels

Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offlinechannels (see the Download Database to the Controllersusing the PDA section).

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 28

Initialise CNC 1 Initialises the CNC if the selected channel is a PAC1100/2100/2200 - RS232 - SWB - CNC channel.1 PAC 1100/2100/2200 - RS232 - SWB - CNC channel only

Abort ChannelDownload 2

Aborts a channel download.2 PAC 1100/2100/2200 channel only

Download ChannelDatabase

Downloads the database to all controllers on the selectedchannel.

Synchronise allchannel clocks

Synchronises all clocks on the system with the clock on the PC.

Modems Displays the Modems window (see the Modems section).

Options when a dialup channel is selected:Dial Now Displays the Dialup Connection window to dialup a modem

(see the Modems section).

Show Call Progress Display the Dialup Connection window to show the dialupprogress (see the Modems section).

Hang Up Display the Dialup Connection window to hang up a dialupconnection (see the Modems section).

Reset Password 1 Displays a warning message to consult the hardwaredocumentation (see the Modems section).1 512 only

Probe Channels Examines the communications channels to locate physicallyconnected controllers.

Download directchannels

Downloads the database to all controllers on selecteddirect/dialup channels.

Download offlinechannels

Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offlinechannels (see the Download Database to the Controllersusing the PDA section).

Abort ChannelDownload 2

Aborts a channel download.2 PAC 1100/2100/2200 channel only

Download ChannelDatabase

Downloads the database to all controllers on the selectedchannel.

Synchronise allcontroller clocks

Synchronises all clocks on the channel to the clock on the PC.

Modems Displays the Modems window (see the Modems section).

Options when an offline channel is selected:Reset Password Displays a warning message to consult the hardware

documentation (see the Reset Password section).

Probe Channels Examines the communications channels to locate physicallyconnected controllers.

Download directchannels

Downloads the database to all controllers on selecteddirect/dialup channels.

Download offlinechannels

Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offlinechannels (see the Download Database to the Controllersusing the PDA section).

Options when an online controller is selected:Probe Channels Examines the communications channels to locate physically

connected controllers.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 29

Download directchannels

Downloads the database to all controllers on selecteddirect/dialup channels.

Download offlinechannels

Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offlinechannels (see the Download Database to the Controllersusing the PDA section).

Configurecontroller 1

Displays the Configure Controller window (see theProbe/Configure/Unconfigure a Controller section).1 Unconfigured controller only

Unconfigurecontroller 2

Unconfigures the selected controller from its channel.2 Configured controller only

Downloadcontroller database

Downloads the database to the selected controller.

Reset DiagnosticCode

Resets the diagnostic code.

Firmware download Displays the Manage Firmware window (see the ManageController Firmware section).

Only download firmware to one server or controller at atime.

Modems Displays the Modems window (see the Modems section).

Options when an offline controller is selected:Probe Channels Examines the communications channels to locate physically

connected controllers.

Download directchannels

Downloads the database to all controllers on selecteddirect/dialup channels.

Download offlinechannels

Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offlinechannels (see the Download Database to the Controllersusing the PDA section).

Connect toController

Connects the controller.

Disconnect fromcontroller

Disconnects the controller.

Identify Controller Displays the Identify/Configure Controller window (see theDownload Database to the Controllers using the PC section).

ToolsEvent Log Displays the Event Log window (see the Event Log section).

System Alarms Displays the System Alarms window (see the System Alarmssection).

Alarm Viewer Displays the Alarm Viewer window (see the Alarm Viewersection).

Card Designer Displays the ID Card Designer window (see the ID CardDesigner section).

Audit Trail Displays the Audit Trail window (see the Audit Trail section).

Alarm MapDesigner

Displays the Alarm Map Designer window (see the Alarm MapDesigner section).

Event to ActionConfiguration

Displays the Event to Action Configuration window (see theEvent to Action section)

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 30

ConfigureOrganisations

Displays the Configure Organisations window (see theConfigure Organisations section).

Manage OEMInterface 3

Displays the OEM Interface Configuration window. Furtherinformation is given in documentation supplied with the OEMproduct.3 only if license allows.

Database Backup Displays the Backup window (see the Backups section).

Event Archiving Displays the Event Archiving window (see the Event Archivesection)

Search Bar Displays the Search bar (Keyholder List View only, see theSearch for a Keyholder section).

Key Seek Displays the Find Keyholder by Key window (see the Searchfor a Keyholder section).

Upgrade License Displays the License Keys window (see Upgrade Licensesection).

ConfigurePeripherals

Displays the Configure Peripherals window (see ConfigurePeripherals section).

Manage ControllerFirmware

Displays the Manage Firmware window (see the ManageController Firmware section).

Change Password Changes the current user's password (see the ChangePassword section).

Options Displays the Organisation Options window (see theCustomisation section).

ReportsStandard A list of standard reports that are displayed when selected (see

the Reports Provided section).

Custom A list of custom reports that are displayed when selected (seethe Add a Custom Report section).

Custom ReportManager

Displays the Custom Report Manager window (see the Add aCustom Report section).

HelpContents Displays this Help file.

About ... Displays information about the version and build of theAdministration Software currently running. The Installer tabdisplays information entered at software installation and theSystem Info button access standard Windows facilities.

3.4.5 Toolbar

To alter the appearance of the icons:

• Right click on the toolbar and the following facilities are then available:

• Toggle the button name by selecting Show Text.

• Toggle the button size by selecting Large Icons (this also affects the Navigator tabin the Explorer bar).

To display the full name of the icon:

• Move the cursor over the button but do not select it.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 31

The icons provide following facilities:Go Back selects the previously selected module. Selecting the down arrow on theleft of the icon, gives a list of modules for reselection.

Go Forward selects the next module if the Go Back icon has been used. Selectingthe down arrow on the left of the icon, gives a list of modules for reselection.

View/Hide Explorer Bar toggles the Explorer bar display.

Update or Add a Current Record confirms any changes made to the currentrecord.

Create a New Record creates a new record.

Delete Current Record deletes the selected record.

Make Copy of Current Record copies the selected record. To add the copied

record, select or the Add button in Property Page.

Discard Changes to Current Record discards any changes since the last Updateor Add operation.

Search Criteria to Refine List View displays the Search bar (see the Search fora Keyholder section).

List View Modes selects how the List View displays its contents. Selecting thedown arrow gives the following options:

Large Icons Displays the list with associated large icons.

Small Icons Displays the list with associated small icons.

List Displays the list only.

Details Displays the list with extra information in columns.

Thumbnails Displays the list with associated photos (Keyholder module only).

Tree View Displays a tree view of the areas (Area module only).

View Event Log displays the Event Log window.

Alarms displays the Alarm Viewer window.

Database Backup displays the Backup window.

Anti Passback Forgive forgives an anti-passback violation by the selectedkeyholder (Keyholder module only).

Probe Controller Connections collects information from physical connections(Hardware module only).

Bring up Modem Configuration Dialog displays the Modems window (Hardwaremodule only.

Refresh updates the current display.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 32

3.4.6 Explorer BarThe Explorer bar has three tabs:

The Navigator tab displays a modules list. Selecting a module,displays appropriate information in the List View and PropertyPage.

The appearance can be altered by right clicking on the toolbarand selecting/deselecting Large Icons.

The Tools tab displays a tools list. Selecting a tool (Event Log,Database Backup, Alarm Viewer, Alarm Map Designer, Eventto Action Configuration, ID Card Designer, Event Archivingor Audit Trail) activates the appropriate tool.

The appearance can be altered by right clicking on the bar andselecting Large Icons or Small Icons.

The Reports tab displays a report folders list . Selecting a reportfolder, displays a list of reports in that folder. Selecting a reportdisplays the report and provides Print facilities.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 33

3.4.7 Status Bar

The Status bar displays the following:

• Messages.

• The currently logged on operator.

• A count of the number of records in the module.

• The maximum number of records allowed in the module (if appropriate).

3.4.8 List ViewThe List View displays all of the records that are associated with the module selected in theExplorer bar. Selecting a record in the List View will cause the properties associated with thatrecord to be displayed in the Property Page.

The List View can be resized by dragging any of the edges.

To customise the list view using the Custom Settings window:1. Select View > Choose Columns (via the

Menus) and the Custom Settingswindow is displayed.

2. Select the check box next to the columnsto be displayed.

3. Enter the column widths.

4. Select from a drop-down list the column tobe used to sort the list.

5. Select the Ascending or Descendingradio button to specify how the list will besorted.

6. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to cancel.

To customise the list view from the list view:

• To select which columns to display, right click on the column heading and select whichcolumns to display from the drop-down menu.

• To alter the column widths, drag the border in the column heading.

• To toggle the list view order, select the column heading and the triangle will toggle forascending or descending order.

To alter the list view:

1. Right click a record, or select the View menu, or the arrow next to the icon.

2. Select a view from the drop-down menu:Large Icons Displays the list with associated large icons.Small Icons Displays the list with associated small icons.Details Displays the list with extra information in columns.Thumbnails 1 Displays the list with associated photos (Keyholder module only).Tree View Displays a tree view of the areas (Area module only).

To create a record:1. Right click on a record and select New from the drop-down menu, or Edit > Create a New

Record, or the icon.

2. Edit the new record.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 34

3. Select the Update or Add button, or Edit > Update or Add Current Record, or the icon.

To copy a record:1. Right click on a record and select Copy from the drop-down menu, or select a record and

Edit > Make a Copy of Current Record, or the icon.

2. Edit the new record.

3. Select the Update or Add button, or Edit > Update or Add Current Record, or the icon.

To delete a record:

• Right click on a record and select Delete from the drop-down menu, or select a record and

the Delete button, or Edit > Delete Current Record, or the icon.

To display a report:

• Right click on a record and select Report from the drop-down menu, or select a record andView > Report List Selection.

To find a record:1. Select a column.

2. Enter the first character(s) of the record (e.g. Entering S in the Name column will find thefirst record with a name starting with S).

To refresh the display:

• Right click on a record and select Refresh from the drop-down menu, or select a record

and View > Refresh, or the icon, or the F5 key.

3.4.9 Property PageThe Property Page displays information associated with the record selected in the List View.

Each module displays different information. The information is displayed on tabbed areas andsome modules have more than one tab to accommodate all the relevant information.

The Property Page can be resized by dragging any of the edges. When there is insufficientroom to display the fields required, scroll bars are displayed to allow access to these fields.

Each Property Page has four buttons:

Update/Add Update is displayed if data is edited. When selected, any changes are saved.

Add is displayed if a new record is being added. When selected, the new recordis saved.

New Allows a new record to be created.

Delete Allows the selected record to be deleted.

Cancel Discards any changes made to the current record providing Update or Addhave not been selected.

NoteThe buttons affect the whole Property Page not just the currently displayed tab.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 35

3.4.10 LogoffTo logoff from the Administration Software:1. Select File > Logoff or press Ctrl-Q and the Log on/Exit window is displayed.

2. You can log on again (see the Logon section) or exit the window by selecting Exit.Note

The system will logoff automatically after 10 minutes if not used. This auto-logout timecan be modified for each operator (see the Operator Details section).

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 36

3.5 Organisation Options3.5.1 CustomisationNote

The options available for customisation depend on the license(s). To apply license(s),see the Upgrade License section.

To customise the system and organisational unit:1. Display the Organisation Options window by selecting Set Organisation Options on the

Welcome Screen or Tools > Options on the Menus.

2. To customise the system settings, select System Settings.

3. To customise the system card formats, select Card Format.4. To customise the system event archiving options, select Event Archiving.

5. To customise the system access options, select System Access.

6. To customise the organisational unit details, select Organisational Unit Details.7. To customise the organisational unit access options, select Access.

8. To customise the organisational unit module names, select Custom Labels.

9. To customise the organisational unit categories, select Categories.

10. To customise the organisational unit keyholder extra information, select Keyholder ExtraDetails.

11. To customise the organisational unit alarms, select Alarms.

12. Select Apply (window remains open) or OK (closes window).Note

OK and Apply save the changes on all the tabs.

3.5.2 System SettingsTo customise the system settings:1. If necessary, display the Organisation

Options window as described in theCustomisation section.

2. Select System Settings.

3. The following facilities are then available:

• Specify a Reminder Interval fordatabase backups.

• Specify PIN Length.

• Select/deselect User Definable PIN.

• Select/deselect Allow PIN Change atDoor.

• Specify a CommunicationProtection Password for PAC1100/2100/2200 Series DoorController dialup channels. Thepassword is an 8-digit key code thatcan be entered manually or via theadministration desktop reader.

4. Select another option or close the window.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 37

3.5.3 Card FormatTo customise the system card formats:5. If necessary, display the Organisation

Options window as described in theCustomisation section.

6. Select Card Format.7. The following facilities are then available:

• Add a new card format

• Edit a card format.

• Delete a card format.

• Move a card format up or down(determines validation order).

• Select the default card format

8. Select another option or close the window.

To add or edit a proximity reader card format, click here.

To add or edit a Magstripe card format, click here.

To add or edit a Wiegand (2601) card format, click here.

3.5.3.1 Proximity Reader

To add or edit a proximity reader card format:1. If necessary, display the Organisation

Options window as described in theCustomisation section.

2. To add, select Card Format and the Addbutton.

3. To edit, select Card Format > ProximityReader and Edit button or ProximityReader.

4. Enter the name and description of theformat

5. Select the type of format (i.e. ProximityReader).

6. Select the display mode.

7. Select another option or confirm thechanges.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 38

3.5.3.2 Magnetic Stripe

To add or edit a Magnetic Stripe reader card format:1. If necessary, display the Organisation

Options window as described in theCustomisation section.

2. To add, select Card Format and the Addbutton.

3. To edit, select Card Format > Mag Stripeand Edit button or Mag Stripe.

4. Enter the name and description of theformat.

5. Select the type of format (i.e. MagneticStripe).

6. Select/deselect LRC Checking (i.e. islongitudinal redundancy checking used?).

7. Select the display mode.

8. Select another option or confirm thechanges.

9. Select the Layout tab.

10. Select token Start (the position of the firstcharacter from the card's data that formspart of the keycode) and Length (thenumber of characters). For furtherinformation, see the manufacturer'sdocumentation. For examples, click here.

If the length is changed after addingkeys, the keys will become invalid.

11. Select/deselect Facility Code. Ifselected, specify the facility code start andlength. If Facility Code is specified thenan access group can be selected todetermine what access should be grantedfor all cards using the specified facilitycode.

12. Select/deselect Issue Code. If selected,specify the issue code start and length.

13. Select/deselect the Issue Code LookAhead. If selected, specify the Offset (thevalue added to the issue code when theNew Issue button on the Keyholder Keyspage is selected) and Range (determinesthe maximum issue code allowed, e.g.offset 1 range 3 then 1,2,3 and 4 are validissue codes).

14. The token length is automaticallycalculated (start+facility code length+issuecode length) but can be increased.

The bars at the bottom indicates the following:

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 39

16. Select another option or close the window.

Examples of start and lengthStart: 1Length: 9Data: 123456789=> Keycode is: 123456789 ..

Start: 1Length: 9Data: 123456789012345690123456789=> Keycode is: 123456789Data after the 9th digit is ignored as this is not part of the token format data

Start: 3Length: 9Data: 123456789012345690123456789=> Keycode is: 345678901Keycode starts from the 3rd digit and is 9 digits long

Start: 7Length: 4Data: 123456789012345690123456789=> Keycode is: 7890

Start: 5Length: 4Data: 115000213=> Keycode is: 21The keycode data has some leading zeros, which means the keycode is 0021. As the keycodeis numerical the leading 0’s add nothing to the keycode, making the keycode value 21.

When encoding to cards, keycodes are padded with leading zeros to the full keycodelength.

Start: 5Length: 5Keycode: 385=> Data will be written as: 0000003854 zeros to get to the start position, and 2 more leading zeros pad out the keycode to make it thefull 5 digits in length.

When encoding to cards, keycodes get padded with zeros to make them work.

Start: 5Length: 5Keycode: 385=> Data will be written as: 0000003854 zeros move the start along, and 2 more zeros pad out the keycode to make it 5 digits inlength.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 40

3.5.3.3 Wiegand (2601 format)Note

If using PAC 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers, the standard Wiegand card formatused with the door controllers must be used for all controllers on the system.

To add or edit a Wiegand reader card format:1. If necessary, display the Organisation

Options window as described in theCustomisation section.

2. To add, select Card Format and the Addbutton.

3. To edit, select Card Format > Wiegand(2601) and Edit button or Wiegand(2601).

4. If necessary, select the Details tab.

5. Enter the name and description of theformat

6. Select the type of format (i.e. Wiegand(2601)).

7. Select Custom Wiegand, UniversalWiegand, or Corporate HID.

8. Select the display mode.

If Custom Wiegand is selected, the layout can be specified:

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 41

1. Select the Layout tab. Note: If WiegandUniversal is selected this tab is notdisplayed.

2. Select token Start (the position of the firstcharacter from the card's data that formspart of the keycode) and Length (thenumber of characters). For furtherinformation, see the manufacturer'sdocumentation. For examples, click here.

If the length is changed after addingkeys, the keys will become invalid.

3. Select/deselect Facility Code. Ifselected, specify the facility code start andlength. If Facility Code is specified thenan access group can be selected todetermine what access should be grantedfor all cards using the specified facilitycode.

4. Select/deselect Issue Code. If selected,specify the issue code start and length.

5. The token length is automaticallycalculated (start+facility code length+issuecode length) but can be increased.

6. Select/deselect Number Even Parity. Ifselected, specify the number of bits to usein the even parity check.

7. Select/deselect Number Odd Parity. Ifselected, specify the number of bits to usein the odd parity check.

The bar at the bottom indicates the following:

8. Select another option or close the window.

3.5.3.4 Adding or Editing a Card Format

To add or edit a card format:1. If necessary, display the Organisation Options window as described in the

Customisation section.

2. To add, select Card Format and the Add button.

3. To edit, select Card Format > card type and Edit button.

4. If necessary, select the Details tab.

For details of a proximity reader card format, click here.

For details of a Magstripe card format, click here.

For details of a Wiegand (2601) card format, click here.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 42

3.5.4 Event ArchivingNote

This window defines when and where events are archived but is only displayed if the userhas Installer or Supervisor privileges.

To customise the system archive configuration:1. If necessary, display the Organisation

Options window as described in theCustomisation section.

2. Select Event Archiving.

3. Specify the Maximum log size (eventcount) used by manual archive only.

4. If archiving is not required, select theDiscard All Events (Do not archive)check box.

5. If archiving is required, enter the Defaultarchive location or use the browsefacility. The archive file is automaticallynamed Edate.csv.

6. Specify the Keep Archives For (i.e. thetime in years to keep archive files).

7. Select the Enable automatic archivingcheck box.

8. If regular archives are required, specifythe Archive events older than in daysand the Minimum no. of events toarchive. For example, if 7 days arespecified, events occurring less than 7days ago are not automatically archivedand remain in the event log until they are 7days old.NoteIf events are to be discarded on archive,ensure that Archive events older than isset to at least 120 days.

9. Select another option or close the window.

Only one archive can be performed each day and automatic archiving is not possibleuntil at least Archive events older than (e.g. 7) days of events are available.Automatic archives are then performed 18:00 only if the minimum number of events toarchive are available and a manual archive has not been performed that day.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 43

3.5.5 System AccessIt is recommended to take a backup of the database before changing the access typebecause information could be lost (e.g. access groups and areas).

To customise the system access:1. If necessary, display the Organisation

Options window as described in theCustomisation section.

2. Select System Access.

3. Select the Access defined by option.

4. Select the Access based on option.

5. Select another option or close the window.

3.5.6 Organisational Unit DetailsTo customise the organisational unit details:1. If necessary, display the Organisation

Options window as described in theCustomisation section.

2. If necessary, select the organisationalunit.

3. Enter the organisational unit name.

4. Enter the organisational unit description.

5. Select the start of the week.

6. Select the time zone.

7. If licensed for Event to Action:

• Enter the E-mail address that will sendthe message generated by the Eventto Action facility.

• Enter the name of the SMTP serverthat uses Simple Mail TransferProtocol to send the Email.

8. Select another option or confirm thechanges.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 44

3.5.7 AccessTo customise the organisational unit access options:1. If necessary, display the Organisation

Options window as described in theCustomisation section.

2. Select Access.

3. Select/deselect Enable Anti-PassbackReset Time. If selected, specify Anti-Passback Reset Time of Day.

4. Select/deselect Enable Denied AccessCounting. If selected, specify the numberof Attempts allowed and the LockdownTime in minutes if the number of failedattempts is exceeded.

5. Select the another option or close thewindow.

3.5.8 Custom LabelsNote

Changing the module names will affect the names in the Explorer bar (e.g. Keyholderscould be changed to Personnel). Also some of the tab labels may be changed (e.g.Category could be changed to Department).

To customise the organisational unit module names:1. If necessary, display the Organisation

Options window as described in theCustomisation section.

2. Select Custom Labels.

3. Enter the new names for the availablecustomised labels.

4. Select another option or confirm thechanges.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 45

3.5.9 CategoriesTo customise the organisational unit categories:1. If necessary, display the Organisation

Options window as described in theCustomisation section.

2. Select Categories (or relevantcustomised label).

3. The following facilities are then available:

• Add a new category by selecting Addand entering a new name anddescription.

• Edit a category by editing the nameand description.

• Delete a category by selecting thecategory and Delete.

• Design an ID card for the selected

category by selecting the button(see the ID Card Designer section).

4. If areas are assigned to a 500 channel:

• Limit the number of times a keyholderin the selected category is allowed toenter the area by selecting an area,selecting the checkbox andincrementing the limit.

• Reset the area usage for allkeyholders in this category by

selecting the button.

• If the Priority Keyholders check boxis selected, keyholders in thiscategory are always downloaded tothe 512 controllers. Otherwise,keyholders are downloaded ondemand.

5. Select another option or confirm thechanges.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 46

3.5.10 Keyholder Extra DetailsNote

The fields are displayed in the Keyholder Property Page when the Extra Informationtab is selected (see the Keyholder Extra Information section) but only the first 5 fieldscan be displayed in the Keyholder List View (see the Keyholder List View section).

To customise the organisational unit keyholder information:1. If necessary, display the Organisation

Options window as described in theCustomisation section.

2. Select Keyholder Extra Details (orrelevant customised label).

3. Select the number of fields required.

4. Enter a description of the information to beincluded in the column.

5. Enter the size of the column. Alternatively,use the increment/decrement buttons toset the required size.

6. Select another option or confirm thechanges.

3.5.11 AlarmsTo customise the organisational unit alarms:1. If necessary, display the

Organisation Options window asdescribed in the Customisationsection.

2. Select Alarms.

3. The following facilities are thenavailable:

• Specify the duration of the alarmsound.

• Test the alarm sound ( starts

the alarm sound and stopsthe alarm sound).

• Change the alarm sound (selectthe Change button and select a.wav file).

• Reset the alarm sound (select theReset button)

• Add alarm response texts (selectthe Add button and enter the newalarm response text).

• Delete an alarm response text(select a text and Delete button).

4. Select another option or confirm thechanges.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 47

If alarm management has been licensed, the alarm points that are not assigned to an area formonitoring by the Alarm Viewer can be specified for monitoring via the System Alarmswindow:

1. Select Alarms > Detail.2. Select the Show alarm dialog for

unmanaged alarms checkbox.

3. Select which events are alarms andwill be displayed in the SystemAlarms window.

4. Select another option or confirm thechanges.

If simple alarm monitoring is being used (i.e. alarm management not licensed) the events to beclassed as alarms can be specified:

1. Select Alarms > Detail.2. Select which events are alarms and

will be displayed in the alarm view ofthe event log.

3. Select another option or confirm thechanges.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 48

3.6 Organisational Units3.6.1 Organisational Units ListNote

This facility is only available if licensed for more than one organisational unit.

To display the organisational unit list:

• Select Tools > ConfigureOrganisations and theConfigure Organisationswindow is displayed.

Further information is given in the Configure Organisations section.

3.6.2 Organisational Unit DetailsNote

This facility is only available if licensed for more than one organisational unit

To add/edit/delete an organisational unit:1. Select Tools > Configure

Organisations and theConfigure Organisationswindow is displayed.

2. Perform one of the following:

• To add, select the Add Newbutton and enter theorganisation’s details.

• To edit, select theorganisation and Edit buttonand enter the new details.

• To delete, select theorganisation and Deletebutton.

3. Select the OK or Apply button.

Further information is given in the Configure Organisations section.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 49

3.7 Keyholders3.7.1 Keyholder List ViewOn initial viewing, the Keyholder List View displays information on keyholders in columns andis in alphabetical order.

General facilities are described in the List View section.Note

The first 5 extra information fields can be displayed in the keyholder list view using theCustomisation facilities. All the extra information fields are displayed in the KeyholderProperty Page (see the Keyholder Extra Information section).

To display information on a keyholder:

• Select a keyholder in the Keyholder List View and the appropriate information will bedisplayed in the Keyholder Property Page.

To search for a keyholder:

• Click here.

Other facilities are described in List View section.

3.7.2 Keyholder Property Page3.7.2.1 Keyholder Details

The Keyholder Property Page is used to define keyholders (e.g. personal details and accessgroup). The identification information is displayed on initial selection.Note

Some labels and table names may have been changed by customisation.

To display details information:1. Select the Keyholder module.

2. Select a keyholder in the List View.

3. If necessary, select the Details tab.

The following can then be specified:Title The title of the keyholder (selected from a drop-down list).

Last Name The last name of the keyholder (specified by data entry).

First Name The first name of the keyholder (specified by data entry).

Initials The initials of the keyholder (specified by data entry).

Start Date The date and time the keyholder started employment or visiting (entered bydata entry and drop-down calendar). Enabled/disabled by selecting itscheck box. If enabled, access is not allowed until the specified date andtime but events (e.g. an attempt to enter) are reported.

End Date The date and time the keyholder ended employment or visiting (entered bydata entry and drop-down calendar). Enabled/disabled by selecting itscheck box. If enabled, access is no longer allowed after the specified dateand time but events (e.g. an attempt to enter) are still reported.

Category The category of the keyholder (selected from a drop-down list). TheCustomisation facilities can be used to create/edit categories.

The category determines the format of the ID card (see the Photo ID

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 50

Module helpfile).

Photo A photo of the keyholder.

The photo can be captured from an image file, Twain device or Videodevice using the Capture button (see the Image Capture helpfile).

A previously-captured photo can be cleared by selecting the Clear button.

A previously-created photo ID card for the keyholder can be printed byselecting the Print ID Card button. For further information, see theKeyholder List View section.

Security Level 1 The security level of the keyholder (selected by increments 0 to 9, 0preventing access to all areas).1 Access by Security Level mode only

Requires ExtraDoor Time

An indication of whether the keyholder requires extra time to get throughthe door (specified by check box).

To forgive an anti-passback violation by this keyholder:1. Select the Tasks button

2. Select Anti-Passback ForgiveTo display a photo ID card print preview:1. Select a keyholder (or keyholders) and File > Preview ID Card in the menus, or right click

on a keyholder (or keyholders) and select the Preview ID Card option and the Printwindow is displayed.

2. Select a printer and the OK button and the Print Preview window is displayed. To print the

card(s), select the icon.

To print photo ID card(s):1. Select a keyholder and the Print ID Card button on the Details tab, or select a keyholder

and File > Print ID Card in the menus, or right click on a keyholder and select the Print IDCard option. If more than one keyholder is selected, the Print ID Card button cannot beselected.

2. Select a printer and the OK button. If one keyholder is selected, followed by the Print IDCard button, the Print Preview window is displayed. To print the card, select the icon.

If using a single-sided card printer, the front is printed first and a message asking if the back isto be printed is displayed. After the front is printed, turn the card over, load it to the printer andselect Yes; if the back is not required, select No.

For information on batch printing, click here.

To encode a magnetic stripe card using a MSR206 Magnetic Stripe Card Writer:

• Select a keyholder and Keyholders > Encode Keycode in the menus or right click ona keyholder and select Encode Keycode and the Encode Keycode window isdisplayed (see the Encode Keycode section).

To print and encode a magnetic stripe card using an Eltron P420 Card Printer:

• Click here (link to TB114 info)

The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete keyholders:Click here.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 51

3.7.2.2 Keyholder Personal Details

To display personal details information:1. Select the Keyholder module.

2. Select a keyholder in the List View.3. Select the Personal Details tab.

The following can then be specified:Employee Number The employee (staff) number of the keyholder (specified by data entry).

Date of Birth The date of birth of the keyholder (specified by data entry or drop-downcalendar).

Home Tel. The home telephone number of the keyholder (specified by data entry).

Work Tel. The work telephone number of the keyholder (specified by data entry).

Mobile Tel. The mobile telephone number of the keyholder (specified by data entry).

e-Mail The e-Mail address of the keyholder (specified by data entry).

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete keyholders:Click here.

3.7.2.3 Keyholder Notes

To display notes information:1. Select the Keyholder module.

2. Select a keyholder in the List View.3. Select the Notes tab.

Notes can then be typed in.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete keyholders:Click here.

3.7.2.4 Keyholder Keys

If an administration reader is to be used to add key codes, an administration reader must beconnected and configured (see Configure Peripherals section).

If the Search bar is displayed in the list view, the Key Code check box must be deselected (seethe Keyholder List View section).

If adding magnetic stripe cards, ensure that the position and length are specified first (seethe Access Options section.

If a PAC 1100/2100/2200 master controller has been configured on the administration kitchannel, keys cannot be added if the master controller is not connected or communicating. If

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 52

this occurs, deselect the Online checkbox on the master controller Details tab.

To display keys information:

1. Select the Keyholder module.

2. Select a keyholder in the List View.3. Select the Keys tab.

4. The following facilities are then available:

• Specify the PIN number for thekeyholder to be used with readers thatsupport user-defined PINs by clickingthe Set PIN button. The PIN number isonly displayed when the PIN field isselected. The PIN number can be

cleared by selecting next to thePIN.

• Enable/disable a key byselecting/deselecting a check box. Ifthe key is disabled, the key will notopen any door.

• Add a new key by presenting the key tothe administration reader or byselecting Add New and entering thekey code. The PIN number iscalculated from the keycode but isonly displayed when the PIN field isselected. The card format can beselected from a drop-down list.

• If Magnetic Stripe keys are being usedand Issue Code Look Ahead hasbeen specified, a New Issue button isdisplayed for when a new issue codeis required.

• Delete a key by selecting next tothe key.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete keyholders:Click here.

3.7.2.5 Keyholder Extra Information

This tab is only displayed if extra information fields have been defined using the Customisationfacilities.

To display extra information:1. Select the Keyholder module.

2. Select a keyholder in the List View.3. Select the Extra Information tab.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 53

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete keyholders:Click here.

3.7.2.6 Keyholder Personal Access

This tab is only displayed in Access by Access Groups mode (see Access Type section).

To display personal access information:1. Select the Keyholder module.

2. Select a keyholder in the List View.3. Select the Personal Access tab.Note

The number of time profiles that can beallocated to a personal access group is2 (i.e. 2 columns).

To allocate time profiles:1. Select the Profile 1 check box.

2. Select the time profile from the drop-down list. Selecting 'No Time Profile' will allow accessto the selected areas at all times.

3. Specify the areas the time profile applies to by selecting/deselecting the area check boxes.

If required, repeat for Profile 2.Note

A keyholder's time profile can be used in conjunction with a PIN reader to limit access buta valid key and PIN is always required to gain access during that time profile.

To display the time profile:1. Right click on the column heading.

2. The following facilities are then available:

• Display the time profile by selecting Show Details.

• Go to the Time Profile Property Page by selecting Navigate To.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete keyholders:Click here.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 54

3.7.2.7 Keyholder Access Groups

This tab is only displayed in Access by Access Groups mode (see Access Type section).Notes

1. Before access groups can be allocated to a keyholder, the access groups (see AccessGroup Details section) must be defined first.

2. If using PAC 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers, only one access group perkeyholder can be assigned.

To display access group information:1. Select the Keyholder module.

2. Select a keyholder in the List View.3. Select the Access Group tab.Note

Before access groups can beallocated to a keyholder, the accessgroups (see Access Group Detailssection) must be defined first.

To allocate access groups to the keyholder:

• Select the appropriate check box(es).

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete keyholders:Click here.

3.7.2.8 Keyholder Events

To display recent events information for this keyholder:1. Select the Keyholder module.

2. Select a keyholder in the List View.3. Select the Events tab.

The latest 10 events associated with thekeyholder are then displayed.

To update the display:

• Select the Refresh button.

To select which columns to display:1. Right click on the column heading.

2. Select which columns to display from the drop-down menu.

To toggle the event order:

• Select the column heading and the triangle will toggle for ascending or descending order.

To display information on the keyholder that generated the event:

• Right click on the event and select Show Details for keyholder or Navigate to keyholderfrom the drop-down menu.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete keyholders:Click here.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 55

3.7.2.9 Keyholder Area Usage

This tab is only displayed in Access by Areas mode (see Access Type section) and requires a500 TCP/IP channel to operate.

To display area usage information:1. Select the Keyholder module.

2. Select a keyholder in the List View.3. Select the Area Usage tab.

The following is then displayed:Name The name of the area.

Default The default number of entries this keyholder is allowed to makeinto this area (specified by category customisation).

NoteThe keyholder must have the same category as that set up incustomisation. If the keyholder has no category or the categorydefault has not been specified, this field is blank.

Remaining The remaining number of entries this keyholder is allowed tomake into this area (specified by data entry or increments andautomatically updated when display is refreshed).

To allow entry into the area if the limit has been reached:

• Select the Reset button.

• Select the Update button and the 'remaining' value is reset to the 'default' value.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete keyholders:Click here.

3.7.3 Add/Update/Delete a KeyholderNote

1. If an administration reader is to be used to add key codes (see Keyholder Keyssection), an administration reader must be connected and configured (see ConfigurePeripherals section).

2. If the Search bar is displayed in the list view, the Key Code check box must bedeselected.

• Select the Keyholder module.

To add a keyholder:1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.

2. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information (select a property page field andpress F1 to obtain help).

3. Select Add.

To update a keyholder:1. Select a keyholder (the Search icon can be used to find the keyholder).

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 56

2. Select each tab in turn and enter/update appropriate information (select a property pagefield and press F1 to obtain help).

3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or select Cancel to discard changes.

To delete a keyholder:1. Select a keyholder (the Search facility can be used to find the keyholder).

2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.

3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the keyholder.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 57

3.8 GuestsThis module is only displayed if multiple organisational units have been defined, see theConfigure Organisations section.

The Guests Page is used to allow a keyholder from a different organisational unit to enterareas in this organisational unit.

To specify an access group to a guests:1. Select the Guests module.

2. Select the Search for a Keyholders inother Organisations checkbox.

3. Enter the Last Name of the visitor.

4. Select the Organisation the visitorbelongs to.

5. Select the Search button and a list ofkeyholders that match the search criteriais displayed.

6. Select the keyholder who is to be aallowed access and the appropriatedetails are displayed.

7. Select the access group required by thevisitor to enter areas (possibly restrictedby time profile) in this organisational unit.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 58

3.9 Operators3.9.1 Operator List ViewThe Operator List View displays a list of Administration Software users. An operator must alsobe a keyholder. The operator privileges determine which functions the user can access.Functions that cannot be accessed are greyed out.

See List View section.

3.9.2 Operator Property Page3.9.2.1 Operator Details

The Operator Property Page is used to define Administration Software users (e.g. thefunctions they are allowed to access). The details information is displayed on initial selection.

To display details information:8. Select the Operator module.

9. Select a user in the List View.10. If necessary, select the Details tab.

The following can then be specified:Login Name The type of user (specified by data entry). Specify a

password for the user by selecting Set Password.

Keyholder Name The keyholder who is also an operator (specified bysearching for an existing keyholder or selecting Create Newand creating a new keyholder). A keyholder can only beassigned one set of operator privileges per organisationalunit.

Expiry Date The date the operator privileges will be removed from thekeyholder (specified by data entry and drop-down calendar).

Auto-Logout Delay (mins) If selected, the operator will be logged out automatically ifthe system is not used for the specified time (range 1 to 120minutes, specified by checkbox and data entry orincrements).NoteIf this value is changed, the updated value takes affect afterthe next login.

Key Login Allowed An indication of whether a key can be used to login(specified by check box).

Key Login Required An indication of whether a key must be used to login(specified by check box).

Password Expired An indication of whether the password has expired and anew password must be specified (specified by check box).

Account Disabled An indication of whether the user is prevented from loggingin (specified by check box).

Last Login The date of the last login (automatically entered).

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 59

To set a password:1. Select the Set Password button and the

Set Password window is displayed.

2. Enter the new password (at least 6characters) and confirm password.

3. Select OK.

The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete operators:Click here.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 60

3.9.2.2 Operator Privileges

To display privileges information:1. Select the Operator module.

2. Select a user in the List View.3. Select the Privileges tab.

To allocate privileges:1. If multiple organisational units exist, select

the Organisation.

2. Select a Privilege Template from thedrop-down list:

Installer - All facilities

Supervisor - All facilities.

Security Manager - Read access to allfacilities except Operators, EventArchiving and Audit Trail; plus writeaccess to keyholders, access groups,areas, time/mode profiles, holidayprofiles.Manager - Read access to all facilitiesexcept Operators; plus write access tokeyholders and add access to eventarchiving.Operator - Write access to all facilitiesexcept Hardware, Alarm Map Designer,Card Designer, Event to Action and AuditTrail.Monitor - Event log facilities only andread only access to time profiles, holidayprofiles, areas, channels, controllers anddoors.Guard - Alarm Viewer and no auto-logout.Guest - Read access only. No access toDatabase Backup, Alarm Viewer, AlarmMap Designer, Event to Action, CardDesigner, Event Archiving, and AuditTrail.

No privilege – Cannot access theorganisational unit.

3. Repeat for each organisational unit (Noprivilege is the default).

NoteIf specifying an installer or supervisor,system customisation is only allowed ifinstaller/supervisor privileges are givento all organisational units.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete operators:Click here.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 61

3.9.2.3 Operator Alarm Viewer

To display alarm viewer information:1. Select the Operator module.

2. Select a user in the List View.3. Select the Alarm Viewer tab.

The following can then be specified:Note

Any changes take affect after the next login.

Pop up windowwhen alarms areactivated

An indication whether an alarm pop-up window is displayed when analarm is generated (specified by check box).

Use flashing icons An indication whether the alarm icon flashes when an alarm isgenerated (specified by check box).

Disable alarmsounds

An indication whether the alarm sound is disabled for this operator(specified by check box).

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete operators:Click here.

3.9.3 Add/Update/Delete an Operator• Select the Operator module.

To add an operator:1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.

2. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information (select a property page field andpress F1 to obtain help).

3. Select Add.

To update an operator:1. Select an operator.

2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).

3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.

To delete an operator:1. Select an operator.

2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.

3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the operator.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 62

3.9.4 Specifying a Keyholder as an OperatorWhen specifying a keyholder as an operator or as a type of event in event to action, there arethree methods of searching for the keyholder.

Auto-Selection1. Start to type in the keyholder name and the system guesses the rest of the name.

2. Accept the name or carry on typing.

Dropdown Button

• Select the icon to choose from a drop-down list.

• The last option in the list is ... which displays the Advanced Keyholder Selection window.

Advanced Search Button

1. Select the icon and the AdvancedKeyholder Selection window isdisplayed.

2. Enter search criteria (e.g. last name).

3. If searching for a key code, select the KeyCode check box and card format. Thenpresent the key to the administrationreader or enter the key code.

4. Select the Search button and allkeyholders matching the search are listed.

5. Select the required keyholder and theSelect button.

To perform a new search:1. Select the Reset button.

2. Enter new search criteria.

3. Select the Search button.

To close the window:

• Select the Close button.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 63

3.10 Time & Mode Profiles3.10.1 Time & Mode Profile List ViewThe Time & Mode Profile List View displays a list of time and mode profiles. A time profile canbe applied to a keyholder or door. A mode profile can be applied to an area, door or reader. Forfurther information on the modes that can be applied, click area, door or reader.

When a time profile is applied to a keyholder (or access group) it determines when a keyholderhas access through a door. When a mode profile is applied to an area, door or reader, itdetermines the mode (e.g. area armed or disarmed, door open or closed). For furtherinformation on the modes that can be applied, click area, door or reader.

A time profile simply specifies a series of active time periods, each of which can span anyperiod with a week or a holiday. In addition to this a mode (door or reader) profile specifies a setof properties to be applied during each time period.

A time/mode profile consists of one or more time periods that can span multiple days. A holidayprofile can be assigned to a time/mode profile to limit access during holiday periods.

See List View section.

3.10.2 Time & Mode Profile Property Page3.10.2.1 Daily Time Profiles

The Daily Time Profile Property Page is displayed on systems that include at least one PAC1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controller.

Up to four different time profiles can be specified (e.g. profile 1 for morning access, profile 2 forevening access, profile 3 for Saturday access, profile 4 for Sunday access).Note

This type of profile is not applicable to mode profiles.

To display daily time profile information:1. Select the Time & Mode Profile module.

2. Select a time profile in the List View.

The following can then be specified:Name The name of the time profile (specified by data entry, e.g. At all Times,

Office Hours, Early Morning, Evening Night, etc.).

Description A description of the time profile (specified by data entry).

Start Time The start time of the time profile (specified by data entry or increments).The Profile check box must be selected.

End Time The end time of the time profile (specified by data entry or increments).

Sunday to Saturday The days of the week the time profile applies to (specified by checkboxes).

No Holiday Profile An indication of whether a holiday profile is not used (selected by radiobutton). If selected, the time profile applies through any holidays.

Use Holiday Profile An indication of whether the holiday profile is used. Only one holidayprofile can be specified for PAC 1100/2100/2200 systems. If selected,

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 64

no access is granted during the holiday periods defined by the holidayprofile.

To add/update/delete time profiles:Click here.

3.10.2.2 Weekly Time Profiles

The Weekly Time Profile Property Page is displayed on systems that do not use PAC1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers.

To display time profile information:1. Select the Time & Mode Profile module.

2. Select a time profile in the List View.

3. If necessary, select the Week tab.

The following can then be specified:Name The name of the time profile (specified by data entry, e.g. At all Times,

Office Hours, Early Morning, Evening Night, etc.).

Description A description of the time profile (specified by data entry).

Sunday to Saturday(start of week mayhave been changedby customisation)

A graphical representation of the start and end times of access for eachday of the week (specified by selecting an area in the bar and draggingwith the mouse button pressed down). A bar represents the start andend times for access and may cover more than one day and occur morethan once in a day (e.g. allowed access in the morning and evening butnot during the day). The start and end times can be changed byselecting and dragging the left or right edge. The boxes at the bottom ofthe display show the day and time of the start and end of the selectedtime period and can be used to alter the specification or fine tune it.

Notes1. The arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to move between bars.

2. Shift + arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to resize the bars.

3. Ctrl + arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to move the bars.

To insert a bar:

• Right click on a day and select New from the drop-down menu, press the Insert key on thekeyboard or click inside the day at the required start point and, keeping the left mousebutton pressed, drag the cursor to the required end time then release the mouse button.

To cut/copy/paste a bar:1. Right click on a bar and select Cut or Copy from the drop-down menu.

2. Right click on a day and select Paste from the drop-down menu.

or

• Press the Ctrl key, select a bar and drag it to the new position while holding the Ctrl keyto copy the bar to a new day.

• Press the Shift key, select a bar and drag it to the new position while holding the Shiftkey to move the bar to a new day.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 65

To delete a bar:

• Right click on a bar and select Delete from the drop-down menu, press the Delete key onthe keyboard or select Edit > Delete Current Record on the main menu.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete time profiles:Click here.

3.10.2.3 Mode Profiles

To display a mode profile information:1. Select the Time & Mode Profile module..

2. Select a mode profile in the List View.

3. If necessary, select the Week tab.

The following can then be specified:Name The name of the mode profile (specified by data entry).

Description A description of the mode profile (specified by data entry).

Sunday to Saturday(start of week mayhave been changedby customisation)

A graphical representation of the start and end times of the mode(determined by the Mode field) for each day of the week (specified byselecting an area in the bar and dragging with the mouse buttonpressed down). A bar represents the start and end times for the modeand may cover more than one day and occur more than once in a day(e.g. allowed access in the morning and evening but not during the day).The start and end times can be changed by selecting and dragging theleft or right edge. The boxes at the bottom of the display show the dayand time of the start and end of the selected time period and can beused to alter the specification or fine tune it.

Access Options The options that are to be applied to the specified times during the timeperiod. These options depend on the type of mode profile:

Area Mode ProfileDoor Mode ProfileReader Mode Profile

Notes1. The arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to move between bars.

2. Shift + arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to resize the bars.

3. Ctrl + arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to move the bars.

To insert a bar:

• Right click on a day and select New from the drop-down menu or press the Insert key onthe keyboard.

To cut/copy/paste a bar:1. Right click on a bar and select Cut or Copy from the drop-down menu.

2. Right click on a day and select Paste from the drop-down menu.

or

• Press the Ctrl key, select a bar and drag it to the new position while holding the

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 66

Ctrl key to copy the bar to a new day.

• Press the Shift key, select a bar and drag it to the new position while holding theShift key to move the bar to a new day.

To delete a bar:

• Right click on a bar and select Delete from the drop-down menu, press the Delete key onthe keyboard or select Edit > Delete Current Record on the main menu.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete mode profiles:Click here.

3.10.2.4 Area Mode Profile Access Options

Mode The area access mode (armed or disarmed) that is applied to thespecified time periods (selected from a drop-down list).

Airlock Airlock can be applied to the area for the specified time periods(selected by checkbox).

Anti-passback Anti-passback can be applied to the area for the specified time periods(selected by checkbox).

3.10.2.4.1 Door Mode Profile Access Options

Mode The door mode (open, first open, bolted or anti-passback) that isapplied to the specified times (selected from a drop-down list).

3.10.2.4.2 Reader Mode Profile Access Options

Mode The reader access mode (PIN, token, PIN or token, or PIN and token)that is applied to the specified times (selected from a drop-down list).

Two Key Access If this checkbox is selected, two valid keys are required for access..

3.10.2.5 Holiday Time Profile

The Holiday Time Profile Property Page is displayed on systems that do not use PAC1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers. Holiday profiles can be assigned to a time/modeprofile to allow/restrict access during holiday periods.Notes

1. If a holiday profile is to be assigned to the time/mode profile, the holiday profile (seeHoliday Profile Property Page section) must be defined first.

2. If the start and end times for the holiday period (specified below) overlap the time profile,the holiday period overrides the time period . For example, if a time period allowsaccess up to 20:00 but the holiday profile prevents access after 18:00, access will beprevented after 18:00 during the holiday period.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 67

To display holiday time profile information:1. Select the Time & Mode Profile module.

2. Select a time/mode profile in the ListView.

3. Select the Holiday tab.

or

The following can then be specified:Holiday Profiles A list of holiday profiles that can be assigned to the time/mode profile

(selected by check box).

Holiday Profile The name of the selected holiday profile (automatically entered).

Start and End Times A graphical representation of the start and end times of mode foreach day of the holiday period(s) (specified by selecting an area inthe bar and dragging with the mouse button pressed down). A barrepresents the start and end times for access (e.g. allowed access inthe morning and evening but not during the day). The start and endtimes can be changed by selecting and dragging the left or rightedge. The boxes at the bottom of the display show the day and timeof the start and end of the selected holiday period and can be usedto alter the specification or fine tune it.

Access Options 1 The access that is applied to the specified times during the holidayperiod. The access options depend on the type of mode profile:

Area Mode ProfileDoor Mode ProfileReader Mode Profile

1 mode profiles only

3.10.3 Add/Update/Delete a Time/Mode Profile• Select the Time & Mode Profile module.

To add a time/mode profile:1. Select one of the following:

New > Create New Simple Time ProfileNew > Create New Area Time ProfileNew > Create New Door Mode ProfileNew > Create New Reader Mode Profile

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 68

Select the icon (defaults to a new time profile) or the option arrow to select CreateNew Time Profile, Create New Door Mode Profile or Create New Reader Mode Profile.

Select Edit > Create a New Record and select Create New Time Profile, Create NewDoor Mode Profile or Create New Reader Mode Profile.

2. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information (select a property page field andpress F1 to obtain help).

3. Select Add.

To update a time/mode profile:1. Select a time/mode profile.

2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).

3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S or select the icon to save changes or Cancel todiscard changes.

To delete a time/mode profile:1. Select a time/mode profile.

2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D or select the icon.

3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the time/mode profile.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 69

3.11 Holiday Profiles3.11.1 Holiday Profile List ViewThe Holiday Profile List View displays a list of holiday profiles but only one holiday profile isallowed if the system is using PAC 1100/2100/2200 controllers. A holiday profile can be appliedto a time profile and takes precedence over the time profile (e.g. if a keyholder has a time profilethat allows access at any time, access is still prevented at times specified by the holidayprofile).

A holiday profile consists of one or more holiday periods that can span multiple days.

See List View section.

3.11.2 Holiday Profile Property PageThe Holiday Profiles Property Page is used to define holiday profiles (e.g. start and enddates). A holiday profile can be applied to a time profile and will override it (prevent it fromfunctioning) if the time profile occurs on any of the dates defined in the holiday profile.

To display holiday profile information:1. Select the Holiday Profile module.

2. Select a holiday profile in the List View.

The following can then be specified:[ 1 512 only systems]

Name The name of the holiday profile (e.g. Standard, Personal).

Description A description of the holiday profile (specified by data entry).

Holiday Period Name The name of the holiday period (specified by data entry, e.g. Easter,Christmas, etc.).

Start Date The start date of the holiday period (specified by data entry or drop-down calendar).

Start Time 1 The start time of the holiday period (specified by data entry or byincrements).

End Date The end date of the holiday period (specified by data entry or drop-down calendar).

End Time 1 The end time of the holiday period (specified by data entry or byincrements).

To create a holiday period:

• Select Add Holiday and specify the holiday period name and dates as described in theabove table. The holiday period must be in the future not the current date.

To delete a holiday period:1. Select a holiday period from the Holiday Period Name list.

2. Select Delete Holiday.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 70

To advance the holiday profile 1 year:1. Select Add+1yr and all the holiday periods are advanced 1 year.

2. Edit any dates that have changed from the previous year (e.g. Easter).

The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete holiday profiles:Click here.

3.11.3 Add/Update/Delete a Holiday Profile• Select the Holiday Profile module.

To add a holiday profile:1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.

2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).

3. Select Add.

To update a holiday profile:1. Select a holiday profile.

2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).

3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.

To delete a holiday profile:1. Select a holiday profile.

2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.

3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the holiday profile.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 71

3.12 Areas3.12.1 Area List ViewThe Area List View and Property Page are only displayed in Access by Areas mode (seeAccess Type section).

The Area List View displays a list of areas. An area is defined by the doors that allow entry intoit and exit out of it.

See List View section.

To move an area to a different part of the tree:1. Ensure View > Tree View is selected.

2. Drag and drop the area in to the new position.

3.12.2 Area Property Page3.12.2.1 Area Details

The Area Property Page is used to define or edit areas.

To display area information:1. Select the Area module.

2. Select an area in the List View.

The following can then be specified:Name The name of the area (specified by data entry, e.g. Reception,

Development, etc.)

Description A description of the area (specified by data entry).

Parent Area The parent area this area belongs to in the hierarchical list of areas(selected from drop-down list).

Door Access A list of associated doors (specified as described in the Access sectionof the Door module). A list of associated readers can be displayed byselecting next to a door.

Comms FailureMode

The lock action in the area if the communications should fail. The optionsare fail safe, fail secure or fail full fail secure (selected by radio button).

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete areas:Click here.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 72

3.12.2.2 Area Appearance

To display appearance information:1. Select the Area module.

2. Select an area in the List View.3. Select the Appearance tab.

The following can then be specified:Area Icons Small and large icons to be used in the area (selected using the

Browse buttons to locate a graphic file). Default icons can beused by selecting the Use default icons check box.

Area Colour The colour to be used on the alarm display board to identify whicharea an alarm is associated with (selected using the Choosebutton.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete areas:Click here.

3.12.2.3 Area Alarm Management

This tab is only displayed if the area has been assigned to a 500 channel (see the ChannelAreas) or PAC 1100/2100/2200 controller (see Controller Alarm Management sections).

To display alarm management information:1. Select the Area module.

2. Select an area in the List View.3. Select the Alarm Management tab.

The following can then be specified:Arm Area Time Profile The time profile used to arm and disarm the area (selected from a

drop-down list).

Alarm Priority (1 to 99) The priority assigned to alarm (specified by data entry orincrements). 1 is the highest priority and 99 is the lowest priority.

Sounder resets whenarea acknowledged

If the check box is selected, the sounder for this area is resetwhen the area alarm is acknowledged.

Sounder resets whenarea reset

If the check box is selected, the sounder for this area is resetwhen the area alarm is reset.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete areas:Click here.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 73

3.12.2.4 Area Alarm Definitions

This tab is only displayed if the area has been assigned to a 500 channel (see the ChannelAreas) or PAC 1100/2100/2200 controller (see Controller Alarm Management sections).

To display alarm definition information:1. Select the Area module.

2. Select an area in the List View.3. Select the Alarm Definitions tab.

The following can then be specified:Event Description A list of event descriptions associated with each alarm.

Always an Alarm An indication of whether the event is always an alarm (specifiedby radio button).

Only when Armed An indication of whether the event is only an alarm when the areais armed (specified by radio button).

To select all Always An Alarm radio buttons:

• Select the Always On button.

To select all Only When Armed radio buttons:

• Select the When Armed button.

The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete areas:Click here.

3.12.2.5 Area Alarm Points

This tab is only displayed if the area has been assigned to a 500 channel (see the ChannelAreas) or PAC 1100/2100/2200 controller (see Controller Alarm Management sections).

To display alarm points information:1. Select the Area module.

2. Select an area in the List View.3. Select the Alarm Points tab.

The following are then displayed:Alarm Points A name and description of alarm points assigned to the area

(automatically entered).

To assign alarm points to an area, see following sections:

• Door Alarm Management

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 74

• Channel Alarm Management

• Controller Alarm Management

• Controller Inputs

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete areas:Click here.

3.12.2.6 Area Outputs

This tab is only displayed if the area has been assigned to a 500 channel (see the ChannelAreas) or PAC 1100/2100/2200 controller (see Controller Alarm Management sections).

To display outputs information:1. Select the Area module.

2. Select an area in the List View.3. Select the Outputs tab.

The following are then displayed:Area Sounders The names and description of outputs that activate sounders

assigned to the area (automatically entered).

Alarm Sensors Resets The names and description of outputs that reset inputs assignedto the area (automatically entered).

To assign outputs to an area, see following section:

• Controller Outputs

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete areas:Click here.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 75

3.12.2.7 Area Management

This tab is only displayed if the area has been assigned to a 500 channel (see the ChannelAreas section).

To specify anti-passback parameters:1. Select the Area module.

2. Select an area in the List View.3. Select an Area Management tab.

The following can then be specified:Timed Forgive (mins) The timeout period when anti-passback violations are cancelled

(specified by checkbox and by data entry or increments).

Disallow anti-passbackforgive

An indication of whether an operator cannot override an anti-passback violation in the area (specified by check box).

Tailgate reset An indication of whether an anti-passback violation in an area isreset by presentation of the key into a different area, providing thekey is valid for that area and is not within the violated area(specified by check box).

To specify the area as an airlock:1. Select the Area module.

2. Select an area in the List View.3. Select an Area Management tab.

The following can then be specified:Door The doors that determine the airlock (at least two must be

selected by checkbox)

No Entry The output that will be activated if entry through the door isprohibited (selected from a drop-down list).

Normal The output that will be activated while in normal condition, i.e.both doors locked and no key being presented (selected from adrop-down list).

Enter The output that will be activated if entry through the door isallowed (selected from a drop-down list).

NoteThe outputs should be latched outputs with no maximum activation time or event-toaction to turn them off. To specify outputs, see the Controller Outputs section.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 76

3.12.2.8 Area Security Level

This tab is only displayed in Access by Areas and Security Level mode (see Access Typesection).

To display access information:4. Select the Area module.

5. Select an area in the List View.6. Select the Security Level tab.

The following can then be specified:Default Security Level The security level required to access the area outside the time

profile (specified by data entry or by increments).

Timed Security Level The security level required to access the area during the timeprofile (specified by data entry or by increments).

Time Profile The time profile allocated to the area (selected from a drop-downlist).

NoteA security level of 0 prevents access to the area at any time by any key.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete areas:Click here.

3.12.3 Add/Update/Delete an Area• Select the Area module.

To add an area:1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.

2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).

3. Select Add.

To update an area:1. Select an area.

2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).

3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.

To delete an area:1. Select an area.

2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.

3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the area.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 77

3.13 Access Groups3.13.1 Access Group List ViewThe Access Group List View and Property Page are only displayed in Access by AccessGroups mode (see Access Type section).

The Access Group List View displays a list of access groups. An access group is a group ofareas and may have a specific time profile associated with each group.

They are applied to a keyholder (see the Keyholder Access Groups section) to restrict themovement of the keyholder to the areas contained in the access group at the times specified bythe associated time profiles (see the Keyholder Personal Access section).

See List View section.

3.13.2 Access Group Property Page3.13.2.1 Access Group Details

The Access Group Property Page is used to define access groups (e.g. the areas associatedwith each access group).

To display access group information:1. Select the Access Group module.

2. Select an access group in the List View.

3. If necessary, select the Details tab.Note

The number of access groups that canbe defined depends on the softwarelicense and the hardware connected.

The following can then be specified:Name The name of the access group name (e.g. Development Team, Night

Guard, Visitor, etc.).

Description A description of the access group (specified by data entry).

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete access group:Click here.

3.13.2.2 Access Group Access

To display time profiles information:1. Select the Access Group module.

2. Select an access group in the List View.3. Select the Access tab.

The following can then be specified:The Profile check box must be selected.

Time Profile The time profile to apply to the selected areas. The time profile isselected from a drop-down list and the associated areas selected

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 78

by check box.

Areas A list of areas associated with the access group. The areasassociated with the time profile are selected by check box.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete access group:Click here.

3.13.2.3 Access Group Advanced

To display advanced information:1. Select the Access Group module.

2. Select an area in the List View.3. Select the Advanced tab.

The following can then be specified:Ignore bolted doors If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this access

group opens a door any locked/bolted door conditions areignored.

Ignore anti-passback If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this accessgroup opens a door any anti-passback conditions are ignored.

Ignore dead bolted doors If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this accessgroup opens a door any deadbolt override/door bolted conditionsare ignored.

Ignore ‘Two Key Access’mode

If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this accessgroup opens a door any two key access requirements areignored.

Disarm privilege If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this accessgroup opens a door the area is disarmed.

Ignore airlocks If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this accessgroup opens a door any airlocks are ignored.

The following conditions will only apply when access is not controlled by airlock, anti-passback,area usage limits, or two-key access:

Allow passage mode If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this accessgroup presents the key twice within the Lock Release Time (LRT)the door is unlocked and remains unlocked until the key ispresented twice again. This time must be > 3s.

Allow first token unlock If this checkbox is selected, when a keyholder with this accessgroup opens a door the door remains unlocked.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete access group:Click here.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 79

3.13.3 Add/Update/Delete an Access GroupThe appropriate areas and time profiles must be created first.• Select the Access Group module.To add an access group:1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).3. Select Add.To update an access group1. Select an access group.2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.To delete an access group:1. Select an access group.2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the access group.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 80

3.14 Hardware3.14.1 Hardware List ViewThe Hardware List View displays a list of channels and controllers. The ConnectedControllers list can be expanded to display connected controllers, doors and lifts. Theconfiguration can be set up before the actual hardware is in place (logical controllers). 500series controller connections can be 'probed' to locate the physical controllers.

Click here for more information on logical and physical controllers

To improve the configuration and installation process of an Administration Software systemthere is the concept of logical and physical controllers in the system.

A logical controller enables the configuration of an Administration Software system without theneed for any physical hardware and enables the areas, access groups, etc. to be configuredoffsite without having hardware present.

A physical controller handles the physical connection between the communications engine andthe controller hardware and these are created during the probe from the Hardware module.Once the physical controllers have been located, the logical controller configurations can bedropped onto the physical controllers to link the required configuration to the physical controller.Likewise should a physical controller need replacing due a hardware failure then theconfiguration can be simply moved to the new controller.

If there is more than one channel defined:1. When a probe is requested, the Select

Channels window is displayed.

2. Select the channels to be probed. Allchannels can be selected using the SelectAll button. All channels can be deselectedby selecting the Clear All button.

3. Select the OK button to start the probe orthe Cancel window to cancel the request.

An example of how controllers can bephysically connected is given in the HardwareConfiguration section.

As well as a tree view of channels and controllers, the following controller information can bedisplayed using the normal list view facilities to manipulate the columns (see the List Viewsection).

Name The name of the controller.

Description The description of the controller.

Type The type of controller (e.g. 512).

#Doors The number of doors allowed for this type of controller.

Base Door# The number of the first door on the controller based on its order on thechannel.

Loaded An indication that the controller has a valid database.

Online An indication of whether controller is online (True) or offline (False).

Comms OK An indication that the PC is communicating with the controller (True)or not (False).

Loading An indication that the controller is being loaded with the database.

Firmware Version The current firmware in the controller.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 81

Serial Number The serial number of the controller.

In addition to the normal list view facilities (see the List View section), the following facilities arealso available:

To contract an expanded tree view:

• Select the icon.

To copy or delete a channel:

• Right click the channel in the tree view and select Copy or Delete.

To probe/configure/unconfigure controllers:

• Click here.

To access 500 TCP/IP channel facilities:1. Right click the channel in the tree view.

2. The following facilities are then available:

• Reset the server password by selecting Reset Password. The password must also bereset at the 500 (see the Manage Controller Firmware section).

• Download the channel database to all controllers on the channel by selectingDownload channel database.

• Synchronise all controller clocks on the channel by selecting Synchronise allcontroller clocks.

• Manage controller firmware by selecting Firmware Download.

To access direct channel facilities:1. Right click the channel in the tree view.

2. The following facilities are then available:

• Initialise the CNC by selecting Initialise CNC (PAC 1100/2100/2200 CNC channel only).

• Download the channel database to all controllers on the channel by selecting Downloadchannel database.

• Abort a channel download by selecting Abort channel download (PAC1100/2100/2200 channel only).

• Synchronise all controller clocks by selecting Synchronise all controller clocks.

• Disconnect the channel by selecting Disconnect the channel.To access dialup channel facilities:1. Right click the channel in the tree view.

2. The following facilities are then available:

• Display the Dialup Connection window by selecting Dial Now, Show Call Progress orHang Up.

• Reset the password by selecting Reset Password. The password must also be reset atthe controller (see the Modems section).

• Download the channel database to all controllers on the channel by selecting Downloadchannel database.

• Synchronise all controller clocks by selecting Synchronise all controller clocks.

To access offline channel facilities:1. Right click the channel in the tree view.

2. The following facilities are then available:

• Reset the password by selecting Reset Password. The password must also be reset at

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 82

the controller (see the Reset Password section).

• Download the channel database to a PC or PDA by selecting Download to PC orDownload to PDA (see the Download to the Controllers using a PC and Downloadto the Controllers using a PDA sections).

See also List View section.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 83

3.14.2 Channel Property Page3.14.2.1 Channel Details

The Channel Property Page is used to define channels . The configuration information isdisplayed on initial selection.

To display channel details information:1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Select a channel in the List View.3. If necessary, select the Details tab.

The following can then be specified:Name The name of the channel (specified by data entry).

Channel Type The type of channel (selected from drop-down list).

Protocol Type The type of protocol (selected from drop-down list).

Computer Name The name of the computer in a multi-PC system (selected from drop-down list).

Communications Port1

The number of the communications port on the PC (selected fromdrop-down list).NoteIf a communications port is configured for a modem, it will not bedisplayed for selection even if the modem is not connected.

500 URL 2 The Universal Resource Locator (i.e. http://address) of the server(specified by data entry or selecting the 500 Probe button).

IP Address 3 The IP address of the 512IP or 2200IP connected to a Ethernet(specified by data entry or selecting the IP Address Probe button).

Online The channel can be taken online/offline (specified by check box).1 Direct channel only2 500 TCP/IP channel only3 Direct TCP/IP channel only

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To perform channel tasks:

• Select Tasks. The following options are then available:

Reset Password - Resets the 500 or offline channel password ( 500 or offline channelonly, see Reset Password section).

Dial Now, Show Call Progress or Hang Up - Displays the Dialup Connection windowto dialup a modem (dialup channel only, see the Modems section).

Download channel database - Downloads to the selected channel.

Abort download 1 - Aborts the download. Only applicable during a download.

Synchronise controller time- Synchronises the time on all controllers with the PC.

Firmware download - Downloads the added firmware to the selected server ( 500channel only, see the Manage Controller Firmware section).

Only download firmware to one server or controller at a time.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 84

To add/update/delete channels:Click here.

3.14.2.2 Channel Areas

This tab is only displayed if the selected channel is a 500 TCP/IP channel.

To display areas information:1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Select a 500 TCP/IP channel in the ListView.

3. Select the Areas tab.

The following are then displayed:Areas A list of areas that can be assigned to the 500 (selected by

check boxes).Note

The default area (i.e. Outside) cannot be assigned to a 500.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete channels:Click here.

3.14.2.3 Channel 500

This tab is only displayed if the selected channel is a 500 TCP/IP channel.

To display 500 information:1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Select a 500 TCP/IP channel in the ListView.

3. Select the 500 tab.

The following are then displayed but can not be modified:Loaded An indication that the server has a valid database.

Loading An indication that the server is being downloaded.

Board Identity The name allocated to the printed circuit board.

Board Version The version number of the printed circuit board.

Firmware Type The type of firmware in the server. Different types mayprovide different features.

Firmware Version The version firmware that has been added.

Board Support PackageVersion

The version of WinCe build.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 85

To suppress/unsuppress asynchronous events:

• Select/deselect the Suppress async events check box.

To use unencrypted/encrypted communications:

• Select/deselect the Use unencrypted communications check box.

To add/update/delete channels:

• Click here.

To specify the override as a 2-state or 4-state input:

• Select the Override is 2-state or Override is 4-state radio button.

3.14.2.4 Channel Alarm Management

To display alarm management information:1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Select a channel in the List View.

3. Select the Alarm Management tab.

The following can then be specified:Alarm Area The alarm area that should be armed if the server is to be

armed (specified by drop-down list).

If none is specified, the server cannot be armed.

Omit Permitted An indication of whether to allow alarms associated with thischannel to be omitted from arming (specified by check box).

Silent Alarm An indication of whether the alarms associated with thischannel are silent (specified by check box).

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete controllers:Click here.

3.14.2.5 Channel Settings

This tab is only displayed if the selected channel is a direct channel.

To display settings information:1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Select a channel in the List View.3. Select the Settings tab.

The following can then be specified:Line Speed1 The baud rate of the channel (selected from drop-down list).

1Direct and Dialup channels only

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 86

The following are displayed but cannot be modified:Timeout The time in milli-seconds before a communication attempt is

cancelled because communication has not been established.

Retry Count The number of communication attempts to try beforeabandoning the communication.

Poll Interval The time in milli-seconds between polling for communicationson the line.

Polls in Slow Poll The number of polls in the poll interval after a communicationsfailure.

3.14.2.6 Channel Dialup

This tab is only displayed if the selected channel is a dialup channel.

To display dialup information:1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Select a dialup channel in the List View.3. Select the Dialup tab.

The following can then be specified:Phone Number The telephone number of the modem connected to the

server/controller (specified by data entry).

Connect Timeout (mins) The timeout in minutes to terminate the connection if there areno updates to the controller.

Dialup Schedule If the check box is selected, the next dialup and dialup intervalcan be specified.

Next schedule dialup at The date and time for the next dialup (specified by data entry ordrop-down calendar and time). If the date specified is in thepast, a dialup is performed when Update is selected and thenext dialup calculated from the dialup interval.

Dialup interval The time between successive dialups.

Use any available modem Any available modem connected to the PC can be used byselecting the radio button.

Use the following modems A list of modems connected to the PC. Modems to use can bespecified by selecting the radio button and then the modemcheck box(es) from the list.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete channels:Click here.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 87

3.14.2.7 Channel DialbackNotes

1. Dialback is only applicable to the controller the modem is connected to.

2. For a PAC 1100/2100/2200 dialup channel, a master controller must be configuredbefore this tab is displayed.

To display dialback information:4. Select the Hardware module.

5. Select a dialup channel in the List View.6. Select the Dialback tab.

The following can then be specified:Enable Dialback Dialback is enabled by selecting the radio button. If enabled, a

dialback is initiated by events at the server/controller.

Primary Modem The name of the primary modem connected to the PC (selectedfrom a drop-down list). The modem must be configured, see theModems section.

Secondary Modem The name of the secondary modem connected to the PC. Thesecondary modem is used if the primary modem is unavailable(selected from a drop-down list).The modem must beconfigured, see the Modems section.

Threshold (percent) The percentage events in the event buffer required to initiate adialback to the PC (specified by data entry or by increments).

PC Site Number 1 The PC site number (range 2 to 128) that is unique on each PCand identifies the channel’s site (selected from a drop-downlist). Sites 2 to 33 can support up to 8 controllers (1 master and7 slaves). Sites 34 to 128 support 1 controller (each one amaster).Note

Site 1 is reserved for direct six wire bus channels.1 PAC 1100/2100/2200 only.

Dialback Events A list of events that will initiate a dialback (selected by checkboxes).

Keep Line Alive 2 If using a GSM modem on the controller with a 'Pay as You Go'SIM card that requires at least one outward call in a specifiedinterval (e.g. every 180 days), the line can be kept alive byspecifying a periodic dialback.

Notes1. The system will make a call between 00:00 and 00:10 hours

on the appropriate day and the call must be answered andkept connected for at least 1 minute.

2. Periodically check your credit by phoning the customerservices department of your service provider and top up ifnecessary.

2 512 only

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 88

Phone Number If this radio button is selected, the phone number for periodicdialback is specified by data entry.

If your service provider allows, it is recommended to dial thespeaking clock (123) and the call will automatically disconnectafter 1 minute. If not dialling the speaking clock, ensure thateach channel dials back on a different day or to a differentnumber.

Dialback to PC If this radio button is selected, periodic dialback is to a modemconnected to the administration PC.

Interval (in days) The interval for periodic dialback specified by data entry orincrements. Consult your service provider to determine the callfrequency required. Always ensure a call is made a few daysbefore the expiry time to allow for service failures.

A firmware download will reset the keep line alive intervalcounter to 0.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete channels:Click here.

3.14.2.8 Channel Layout

To display layout information:1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Select a channel in the List View.3. Select the Layout tab.

The layout displays a list of controllersassociated with the channel.

To display a list of controllers associated with a server:

• Select the sign next to the server.

To display a list of doors associated with an access controller:

• Select the sign next to the access controller.

To display a list of readers associated with a door:

• Select the sign next to the door.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete channels:Click here.

3.14.2.9 Add/Update/Delete a Channel

• Select the Hardware module.

To add a channel:1. Select New and Create New Channel or Create New 500.

2. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information (select a property page field and

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 89

press F1 to obtain help).

3. Select Add.

4. Wait for the communications to be established before probing for controllers.

To update an channel:1. Select a channel.

2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).

3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.

To delete an channel:1. Select an channel.

2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.

3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the channel.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 90

3.14.3 Controller Property Page3.14.3.1 Controller Details

The Controller Property Page is used to define door controllers (e.g. controller type andaddress). The controller details are displayed on initial selection.

To display details information:1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Select a controller in the List View.3. If necessary, select the Details tab.

The following can then be specified:Name The name of the controller.

Description A description of the controller.

4-State Override An indication of whether 4-state monitoring of the controller override isused (specified by checkbox).

Type The type of controller (selected from a drop-down list).

Channel 1 The channel associated with the controller (automatically entered).

500 2 The 500 associated with the controller (selected from a drop-downlist). Select ' None' if the controller is not on a 500 channel.

Lock Sharing (n andm) 3

An indication of whether the lock is controlled by an in and out readeron door channels n and m (specified by check box). This should onlybe used with PAC 1100/2100 Series Door Controllers or Wiegandin and out readers.

Online 4 The controller can be taken online/offline (specified by check box).1 Only if the controller has been assigned to a channel.2 Only if the controller has not been assigned to a channel3 Not input/output controllers4 Only for connected controllers

To perform controller tasks:

• Select Tasks.

• The following options are available for an online controller:Configure controller or Unconfigure controller - Displays the Configure Controller orUnconfigure Controller window.

Download controller data - Downloads to the selected controller.

Abort download 1 - Aborts the download. Only applicable during a download.

Synchronise controller time- Synchronises the time on all controllers with the PC.

Set Modem Initialization String - Displays the Modem Initialization String window.

Firmware download - Downloads the added firmware to the selected controller (see theManage Controller Firmware section).

Reset diagnostic code – Resets the diagnostic code.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 91

Only download firmware to one server or controller at a time.

• The following options are available for an offline controller:Identify Controller - Displays status information for the controller currently connected.

Connect to Controller - Connects the controller to the PC – this option will be grayedout until the Identify Controller steps have been completed.

Whilst connected a further set of options becomes available under the tasks menu:

Download controller database - Downloads the database to the selected controller.

Firmware download - Downloads the added firmware to the selected controller (see theManage Controller Firmware section).

Only download firmware to one controller at a time.

Reset diagnostic code - Resets the diagnostic code (link to glossary).

Disconnect from Controller – Disconnects the controller from the PC.

The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete controllers:

• Click here.

To probe/configure/unconfigure controllers:

• Click here.

3.14.3.2 Controller Information

This tab is only displayed if the selected controller has been probed.

To display controller information:1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Select a controller in the List View.

3. Select the Controller tab.

The following are then displayed but can not be modified:Serial Number The serial number of the controller.

Firmware ID The firmware identity of the controller.

Firmware Version The current firmware in the controller.

Firmware Type The type of firmware in the controller. Different types mayprovide different features.

Board Revision The revision number of the printed circuit board of thecontroller.

Power Status The status of the controller's power supply.

Battery Status The status of the controller's battery.

Backup Battery Status The status of the controller's backup battery.

Battery Level The charge on the controller's battery.

Diagnostic Code The diagnostic code of the controller.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 92

To add/update/delete controllers:Click here.

To probe/configure/unconfigure controllers:Click here.

3.14.3.3 Controller 2100/2200

This tab is only displayed if the selected controller is a PAC 1100/2100/2200 Series DoorController.

To display PAC 1100/2100/2200 information:4. Select the Hardware module.

5. Select a PAC 1100/2100/2200 controllerin the List View.

6. Select the 2100/2200 tab.

The following can then be specified:[1 PAC 1100/2100/2200 - RS232 -SWB protocol only]

Master 1 An indication of whether the door controller is a mastercontroller (specified by radio button).

Slave 1 An indication of whether the door controller is a slavecontroller (specified by radio button).

Slave Address The address of the slave controller is selected by data entryor increment.

For PAC 1100/2100/2200 - RS232 - SWB protocol, theaddress of the master controller is always 1 and isautomatically allocated if the Master radio switch isselected,. The slave address range is 2 to 8.

For PAC 1100/2100/2200 - RS232 -SWB - CNC protocol, theCNC is the master controller. The slave address range is 1to 32.

Master Override Input An indication of whether a override condition on the master(e.g. fire alarm) unlocks all the doors on the slave controller(specified by check box).

Anti-passback n and m An indication of whether anti-passback is enabled on thedoor channels n and m (specified by check box).

Also apply to exit An indication of whether the anti-passback also applies tothe Exit readers of the door channels (specified by checkbox).

Anti-passback timeout The timeout period (in minutes) when an anti-passbackviolation is cancelled (specified by data entry or byincrements).

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete controllers:Click here.

To probe/configure/unconfigure controllers:Click here.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 93

3.14.3.4 Controller Doors

This tab is only displayed if the selected controller is an access or door controller.

To display doors information:1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Select a controller in the List View.

3. Select the Doors tab.

The Doors tab displays a list of doorsassociated with the controller.

To display a list of readers associated witha door:

• Select the sign next to the door.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete controllers:

• Click here.

To probe/configure/unconfigure controllers:

• Click here.

3.14.3.5 Controller Inputs

To display input configuration information:1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Select a controller in the List View.

3. Select the Inputs tab.

4. If necessary, select the InputConfiguration tab.

The following can then be specified:List A list of inputs associated with the controller (automatically

entered). An input can be defined by selecting a check boxor check boxes.

If a PAC 1100/2100/2200 controller is selected, the list is atree view that can be expanded to list the inputs on anyAlarm Event Managers connected to the controller.

Name of Input n The name of the selected input (specified by data entry).

Description The description of the selected input (specified by dataentry).

Input Type 11 500 Series Controller only

The type of the selected input (specified by drop-down list). 2

NoteAEM input types must be set using the switch bank andjumper on the AEM.

Disarm Time Profile 3 The time profile that disarms the input (specified by drop-down list).

If specified, no alarms or events are generated during thetime profile.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 94

Input Mode The mode of the selected input (specified by drop-downlist).4

Pulse Count 1 The number of triggers that need to occur before an alarm isgenerated for the selected input (specified by data entry orincrements).

Pulse Count Time 1 The time in seconds that the pulse count operates for theselected input (specified by drop-down list).

Count is reset when time expires and starts from lastactivation.

Debounce Time 1 The time in milliseconds that the selected input must be in astate before that state is registered (specified by drop-downlist).

Debounce times is important for proper use of pressureswitches, strain gauges and other sensors that are “bouncy”.Debouncing is also important for resistance to ac inductionon long cable runs. 5

Do not set a time that will override the pulse count.Note

When specifying a debounce time, the input signalmust be in a stable state for at least 200mS after theend of the debounce time before it is recognised.

Configured from Template A template of input conditions to aid specification (selectedfor a drop-down list). The template specifies the inputconfiguration and alarm properties. 6

1 500 Series Controllers only2 Input Types

Type State 512 Event PAC 1100/2100/2200 Series Event

NO Open input normal sensor open

Closed input active sensor closed

NC Open input active sensor open

Closed input normal sensor closed

3 State NO Open input normal N/A

Closed input active N/A

Cut input open tamper N/A

3 State NC Open input active N/A

Closed input normal N/A

Short input short tamper N/A

4 State NO Open input normal sensor open

Closed input active sensor closed

Cut input open tamper circuit cut

Short input short tamper circuit shorted

4 State NC Closed input normal sensor closed

Open input active sensor open

Cut input open tamper circuit cut

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 95

Short input short tamper circuit shorted3 PAC 1100/2100/2200 Controllers only4 Input Modes24-Hour Alarm If the input enters an active or tamper alarm state, an alarm message willbe displayed in the Alarm Viewer and Event Log. Input inactive events only appear in the EventLog.

24-Hour Information If the input enters a tamper alarm state, an alarm message will bedisplayed in the Alarm Viewer and Event Log. Input active events and input inactive events onlyappear in the Event Log.

Controlled Alarm If the input enters an active or tamper alarm state, an alarm message willbe displayed in the Alarm Viewer only if the area is armed. Note that input tamper alarmmessages also displayed in the Alarm Viewer when the area is not armed.

Lift - An input that allows a lift button selection to be monitored.5 Examples

Input Function Debounce Time/mS

Request-to-exit 200

Break-glass,

DC Override,

Alarm Zone

500

Door Contact, Latch Contact >1s6 Input Templates

Template Input Type Input Mode Pulse Countand Time

DebounceTime

AlarmProperties

24-HourVisible Panic

4 State N0 24-HourAlarm

200ms

24-HourInvisiblePanic

4 State N0 24-HourAlarm

200ms Silent Alarm

24-HourBurglary

4 State N0 24-HourAlarm

3; 5s 200ms

24-HourInformation

4 State N0 24-HourAlarm

200ms Silent alarm

ControlledInterior

4 State N0 ControlledAlarm

200ms Omit permitted

ControlledExterior

4 State N0 ControlledAlarm

3; 5s 200ms Omit permitted

Lift NO Lift 200ms

To display alarm properties information:

• Select the Alarm Properties tab on theController Inputs page.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 96

The following can then be specified:List A list of inputs associated with the controller (automatically

entered). A single input or several inputs can be specifiedby selected a check box or check boxes.

Alarm Area The alarm area that should be armed if the controller is tobe armed (specified by drop-down list).

If none is specified, the controller cannot be armed.

Omit permitted An indication of whether to allow alarms associated withthis input can be omitted from arming (specified by checkbox).

Silent Alarm An indication of whether the alarms associated with thisinput are silent (specified by check box).

Configured from Template A template of input conditions to aid specification (selectedfrom a drop-down list). The template specifies the inputconfiguration and alarm properties. 5

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete controllers:Click here.

To probe/configure/unconfigure controllers:Click here.

3.14.3.6 Controller Outputs

To display output configuration information:1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Select a controller in the List View.

3. If necessary, select the Outputs tab.

4. If necessary, select the OutputConfiguration tab.

The following can then be specified:List A list of outputs associated with the controller (automatically

entered). An output can be specified by selected a checkbox or check boxes.

If a PAC 1100/2100/2200 controller is selected, the list is atree view that can be expanded to list the outputs on thecontroller and on any Alarm Event Managers connected tothe controller.

Name of Output n The name of the selected output (specified by data entry).

Description The description of the selected output (specified by dataentry).

Time Profile The time profile to apply to the output (specified by drop-down list).

Output Type The type of the selected output (specified by drop-down list).1 Link to output types

Momentary Time 2 The time that the selected output will be on (specified bydrop-down list).

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 97

2 Momentary outputs only

Delay Before Activation (secs)3

The time delay before the output activates; 0 means nodelay (selected by check box and specified by drop-down listif the Delay Before Activation checkbox is selected).3 PAC 1100/2100/2200 only

Maximum Activation Time(min) 4

The time in minutes before the selected output will beautomatically turned off; 0 means no maximum activationtime (selected by check box and specified by drop-down listif the Maximum Activation Time checkbox is selected).4 Latched outputs only

Cycle Time (s) 5 The total time in seconds for the pulse to cycle on/off(specified by data entry or increments).5 Pulsed outputs only

Active (%)5 The period of cycle the selected output is on as % of cycletime (specified by data entry or increments).4 Pulsed outputs only

Number of Pulses 5 The maximum number of pulses of the selected output(specified by data entry or increments if the Number ofPulses checkbox is selected).5 Pulsed outputs only

Configured from Template A template of output conditions to aid specification (selectedfrom a drop-down list). The template specifies the outputconfiguration. 6

6 Link to output templates

To display output details information:1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Select a controller in the List View.

3. If necessary, select the Outputs tab.

4. If necessary, select the Details tab.

The following can then be specified:Relay Rating The relay rating on the relay on the selected controller

(automatically entered).

Assigned to Area The area associated with the output (selected from a drop-down list).

Area Sounders If the radio button is selected, the output will activate asounder for the specified area.NoteArea sounder should not be used with a toggle output as theoutput is automatically reset when the alarm isacknowledged and/or restored (see the Area AlarmManagement section).

Alarm Sensors Reset If the radio button is selected, the output will reset an inputthat is in alarm, i.e. an Area Reset command from the AlarmViewer will clear the alarm condition.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 98

Manual If the radio button is selected, the output is activatedmanually.NoteThe output cab be placed on an Alarm Map and thenmanually controlled from the Alarm Viewer.

Local Area Alarm If the radio button is selected, the output is activated if thearea is armed.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 99

To specify output activation information:This tab is only displayed for PAC 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers.

1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Select a controller in the List View.

3. If necessary, select the Outputs tab.

4. If necessary, select the OutputActivation tab.

5. Select the Add button to add an outputactivation condition.

6. Repeat Step 5 for each output activationcondition required (e.g. if the output is tobe activated when an input active or doorleft open alarm is detected, two outputactivation conditions must be specified).

7. If necessary, select an output activationcondition and the Delete button to deleteit.

The following can be specified for each output activation condition:Name The name of the output condition (specified by data entry).

When condition The event that will trigger the output activation (selected froma drop-down list).NoteIf PIN Reader Duress is selected, a maximum activation timefor the relay output must be specified to switch off the output.

Source Name The name of the item that may generate the event (selectedfrom a drop-down list).

The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete controllers:Click here.

To probe/configure/unconfigure controllers:Click here.

Output TypesLatched The output will stay on until turned off (e.g. by event to action) or the maximumactivation time expires.

Momentary The output will stay on until the momentary time expires.

Toggle The output will toggle its state each time it is activated (i.e. if the output is on the nextactivation will switch it off, if the output is off the next activation will switch off).

Pulsed The output will pulse until turned off (e.g. by event to action) or the number of pulsesexpires.

Output Templates

Template OutputType

MomentaryTime

Cycle Time Active

InternalSounder

Pulsed 2s 50%

SensorReset

Momentary 3s

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 100

3.14.3.7 Controller Alarm Management

To display alarm management information:1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Select a controller in the List View.

3. Select the Alarm Management tab.

The following can then be specified:Alarm Area The alarm area that should be armed if the server is to be

armed (specified by drop-down list).

If none is specified, the server cannot be armed.

Omit Permitted An indication of whether to allow alarms associated with thiscontroller to be omitted from arming (specified by checkbox).

Silent Alarm An indication of whether the alarms associated with thiscontroller are silent (specified by check box).

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete controllers:Click here.

3.14.3.8 Add/Update/Delete a Controller

• Select the Hardware module.

To add a controller:1. Select New and Create New Controller or press Alt-NC.

2. Enter the controller details and select each tab in turn to check the other information (selecta property page field and press F1 to obtain help).

3. Select Add.

4. Probe and configure the controller.

5. Download the database to the controller :

• Select the Details tab.

• Select the Tasks button.

• Select Download controller database.To update a controller:1. Select a controller.

2. Enter appropriate information (select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help).

3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.

4. Download the new database to the controller :

• Select the Details tab.

• Select the Tasks button.

• Select Download controller database.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 101

To delete a controller:1. Select an controller.

2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.

3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the controller.Note

Deleting a controller deletes its associated doors.

3.14.3.9 Probe/Configure/Unconfigure Controllers

• Select the Hardware module.

To probe the controller configuration:1. Ensure that the channels are correctly specified.

2. Select Probe Channels icon or Controller > Probe Channels. If there is more than onechannel, the Select Channels window is displayed. Select the channels to be probed andthe OK button.

The physical connections are probed and the software configured.

The controller barcode allocation table provided with the controller and in the Reports tabshould be used to aid configuration.

To configure a controller to a channel:1. Drag and drop the selected controller on

to one of the connected controllersindicated by the serial number.Alternatively, right click a controller serialnumber, select Configure Controller fromthe drop-down list, enter the controllername and select OK. The ConfigureController window is displayed.

2. Select the option to download to thecontroller and OK. If this option is notselected, a download can be performedlater by selecting the controller and Tasks(see the Controller Details section).

To unconfigure a controller from a channel:

• Right click the channel serial number and select Unconfigure Controller from the drop-down list.

3.14.3.10 Online Controller Tasks

To perform controller tasks on a configured controller, see the Controller Details section.

To perform controller tasks on a probed but unconfigured controller:1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Select an unconfigured controller and theUnconfigured Controller window isdisplayed.

The following are then displayed but can not be modified:Serial Number The serial number of the controller.

Firmware Version The current firmware in the controller.

Firmware Type The type of firmware in the controller. Different types mayprovide different features.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 102

Board Revision The revision number of the printed circuit board of thecontroller.

• Select Tasks. The following options are then available:

Download controller data - Downloads to the selected controller.

Synchronise controller time- Synchronises the time on all controllers with the PC.

Firmware download - Downloads the added firmware to the selected controller (see theManage Controller Firmware section).

Only download firmware to one server or controller at a time.

The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 103

3.14.4 Offline Channel and Controller Tasks3.14.4.1 Download Database to the Controllers using the PC

A connected controller is automatically disconnected if an update is performed or adifferent module is displayed. Therefore the following procedure from Step 1 (or Step 9 ifalready identified and configured) is required after any updates.

1. Physically connect an offline controller tothe PC (this controller is then the gatewaycontroller).

2. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.

3. Select the gateway controller.

4. Select the Tasks button.

5. Select the Identify Controller button andthe Identify/Configure Controller windowis displayed.

6. Select the COM port the gatewaycontroller is connected to and the Identifybutton and the window is populated withthe controller details.

7. Select the Configure button and theConfigure Controller window isdisplayed.

8. Select OK to configure the controller orCancel to return to the Identify/ConfigureController window.

9. Select the Tasks button and the Connectto Controller option and the ConnectController window is displayed.

10. Select the COM port the gatewaycontroller is connected to.

11. Select the Connect button and select OKon the Successfully Connected tocontroller window and the ControllerSynchronisation Command window isdisplayed.

12. When the event collection process is100% complete, select OK and thecontroller will be available for download.

13. Select the Tasks button and theDownload controller database option.

14. When the download process is 100%complete, select OK and the controllercan be physically disconnected from thePC.

The controller can be left connected andany events will be displayed in the eventlog.

15. Select the Tasks button and theDisconnect from controller option.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 104

3.14.4.2 Download Database to the Controllers using the PDA

1. Physically connect the PC to a PDA via anRS-232 channel.

2. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.

3. Select Hardware > Download offlinechannels and the Offlinesynchronization required window isdisplayed.

4. Select the channel to download to andselect Next.

5. When the download process is 100%complete, select OK and the PDA can bephysically disconnected .

6. Physically connect the PDA to the anoffline controller (this controller is then thegateway controller) and use the PDAfacilities to download the database to thecontrollers.

3.14.4.3 Upload Database from PDA to a PC

1. Select the Hardware module in the Explorer bar.

2. Physically connect the PDA to the PC via an RS-232 or USB port (using the cable providedwith the PDA) and the upload will start automatically.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 105

3.14.5 Lift Property Page3.14.5.1 Lift Details

The Lift Property Page is used to define lift readers. A lift reader is a multi-access reader thatcan be used to control access to one or more areas (e.g. floors or lockers). When used in a lift,a valid key would allow access to specific floors by enabling appropriate lift buttons. Each floorof the lift is configured as an area controlled by the same 500 as the controller the lift reader isconnected to.

To display details information:1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Expand the Connected Controllers list inthe List View.

3. Select a lift reader.

4. If necessary, select the Details tab.

The following can then be specified:Name The name of the lift (specified by data entry).

500 The 500 controlling the lift (selected from a drop-down list).

Reader The name of the lift reader (selected from a drop-down list). Liftreaders must be specified first, see the Add/Update/Delete a LiftReader section). The reader activates the appropriate destinationsoutputs when a keyholder presents a key to the reader. Normally thedestination outputs are connected to lift floor buttons that are enabledwhen a valid key is presented to the reader located inside the lift.

Selection Time The time (in seconds) a lift button remains selectable (selected bydata entry or increments).

Extra Selection Time The extra time (in seconds) a lift button remains selectable if thekeyholder requires extra door time (specified by data entry or byincrements). The Requires Extra Door Time check box must beenabled for the keyholder (see the Keyholder Details section).

To add/update/delete a lift reader:

• Click here.

3.14.5.2 Lift Destinations

To display configuration information:1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Expand the Connected Controllers list inthe List View.

3. Select a lift reader.

4. If necessary, select the Destinations tab.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 106

The following can then be specified:Area A list of areas (floors) each associated destination output (e.g.

connected to a lift button) gives access to (added using the Add Newbutton and selected from a drop-down list).

Output A list of destination outputs used to activate each lift button (selectedfrom a drop-down list).

Input A list of inputs (optional) that allows a lift button selection to bemonitored (selected from a drop-down list). This is necessary to usethe area usage facility.

Out of Hours Exit An indication of whether out of hours exit is allowed (selected bycheck box).

To add an area (floor):

• Select the Add New button.

To add/update/delete a lift reader:

• Click here.

3.14.5.3 Lift Access

This tab is accessed via the Door module. Door details, door configuration and door alarmmanagement for door channels that have lift readers are defined in the same way as ordinarydoor channels.

To display access information:1. Select the Door module.

2. Select a door channel that has lift readersin the List View .

3. If necessary, select the Access tab.

The following can then be specified:

Reader Type The type of reader(s) connected to the lift (selected from a drop-downlist).

SIG A / SIG B One of the door channels can be used for door access. The lift accessspecified on the Lift Destinations tab.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To add/update/delete a lift reader:

• Click here.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 107

3.14.6 Add/Update/Delete a Lift ReaderThe appropriate 500, controllers, areas (floors), time profiles, inputs and outputs must becreated first. All the controllers providing readers, outputs and inputs must be connected to thesame 500. All the areas must be assigned to the same 500 and cannot have anti-passback orairlock properties. Inputs can be assigned for monitoring and/or area usage.

The readers, inputs and outputs associated with a lift are assigned by the lift readerconfiguration.

To add a lift reader:1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Select New and Create New Lift.5. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information (select a property page field and

press F1 to obtain help).

6. Select Add.

To add lift inputs and outputs:1. Select a controller in the List View,

2. Select the Inputs tab and specify each relevant input as a lift input (i.e. 2-state normallyopen).

3. Select the Outputs tab and specify each relevant output as a lift output (i.e. Latched withno maximum activation time).

4. Select the Update button.

To update a lift reader:1. Select the Door module.

2. Select a door channel with a lift reader.

3. Select each tab in turn and enter/update appropriate information (select a property pagefield and press F1 to obtain help).

4. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.

To delete a lift reader:1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Expand the Connected Controllers list in the List View.

3. Select a lift reader.

4. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.

5. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the lift reader.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 108

3.15 Doors3.15.1 Door List ViewThe Door List View displays a list of doors. A door is used to access an area and is configuredby defining the readers that allow/disallow access into that area (e.g. a door can be defined byan in and out reader).

See List View section.

3.15.2 Door Property Page3.15.2.1 Door Details

The Door Property Page is used to define doors (e.g. lock behaviour and time profile). Thedoor details are displayed on initial selection.

To display details information:1. Select the Doors module.

2. Select a door in the List View.3. If necessary, select the Details tab.

The following can then be specified:Name The name of the door (specified by data entry).

Description A description of the door (specified by data entry).

Door Profile A time/mode profile that determines when the door is unlocked orwhen the door is in particular mode, e.g. anti-passback in operation(selected from a drop-down list).

Door Status 1 The Use Count ( the number of access granted events since a ResetUse Count) and Door Mode (controlled by a time/mode profile orTasks button).1 512 only

To perform door tasks:1. Select Tasks. The following options are then available. For Offline channels, these tasks

are only available when connected to the controller:

Secure Door – this will lock the door if the door is unlocked (e.g. on a time profile)

Unlock Door –this will unlock the door indefinitely or for a specified time.Bolt Door – this has different functions for door types, click here for further information.(link to glossary)

Normal Door Operation – this returns the door to normal operation (e.g. locked orunlocked on a time profile).

Set Mode 1 – this applies a specified a door mode profile.

Unlock Once 1 – this unlocks the door for the lock release time.

Issue Request to Exit - this unlocks the door for the lock release time.

Reset Use Count 1 - this reset the use count to zero.1 512 only

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 109

2. If Unlock Door is selected, the UnlockDoor window is displayed. Select theUnlock door indefinitely or Length oftime to unlock door radio button andspecify the length of time (max. 255minutes). Then select the OK button

3. If Set Mode is selected, the Door ModeSettings window is displayed. TheSecurity Mode displays the current modeand can be altered by selecting therequired Security Mode from a drop-down list and the length of time it will beapplied. For each direction, select theAccess Mode and whether Two CardAccess is required. Then select the OKbutton

The other buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To update doors:Click here.Note

To add or delete doors, the appropriate controller must be added or deleted (seeController Details section).

3.15.2.2 Door Access

Two readers (in and out) can be attached to each door. Alternatively, one reader and oneRequest to Exit switch can be used.

If the controller controls a lift reader, see the Lift Access section.

If the controller controls a muster reader, see the Muster and Evacuation section.Note

PAC 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers only allow one reader per door channeland all controllers only allow one Wiegand or Magstripe reader per door channel.Therefore, if using PAC 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers, Wiegand or Magstripereaders, lock sharing must be enabled for in and out readers (see Controller Detailssection).

To display access information:1. Select the Door module.

2. Select a door in the List View.3. Select the Access tab.

The Access tab displays the door channel for the selected door. If a PAC 1100/2100 door with locksharing is selected, the two door channels associated with the door are displayed. The format of thedisplay depends on the access type and reader type. If the reader type is defined as Wiegand, onlyone Wiegand reader per door channel can be defined.

The following can then be specified:[ 1 Access by Areas mode only; 2 Access by Doors mode only ; 3 512 only

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 110

Reader Type The type of reader(s) connected to the door (selected from a drop-down list).

Area 1 The area the reader gives access to (selected from a drop-down list).Notes1. If the door has an anti-passback door mode assigned, SIG A is the

Entry reader.2. If the door also has lock sharing specified, door channel 1 is the

Entry reader.Profile For 512, the reader mode profile to apply to the reader (selected from

a drop-down list).For PAC 1100/2100/2200, the time profile to apply to a PIN reader(selected from a drop-down list). If a time profile is selected, a PIN isnot required during the time period only a valid token.

Allow Access 2 An indication of whether access is allowed through this door to validkeyholders (specified by radio button).

Reader connected 1 An indication of whether a reader is connected to this SIG line(specified by radio button).

No reader connected An indication of whether a Request to Exit switch is connected to thisSIG line (specified by radio button).

Out of hours access An indication of whether out of hours access is allowed (selected bycheck box).

Tamper Mode 3 An indication of whether reader tamper is disabled or enabled on thedoor channel (selected from a drop-down list).

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To update doors:Click here.Note

To add or delete doors, the appropriate controller must be added or deleted (seeController Details section).

3.15.2.3 Door Configuration

To display configuration information:1. Select the Door module.

2. Select a door in the List View.3. Select the Configuration tab.

The following can then be specified:[ 1 512 only; 2 PAC 1100/2100/2200 only]3 EOL Door Inputs

Each door channel on the controller has an input (I/P), Request to Exit (RTE) and Door Contact(DC) connections that can be used to supervise detectors. Four different input states can bedetected by fitting end-of-line resistors to the appropriate connector and 0V. These states are:

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 111

Input StatesState Description Meaning1 Switch open Reader tamper alarm2 Switch closed Reader tamper alarm cleared3 Short circuit Reader tamper line short4 Wire cut Reader line cutRTE StatesState Description Meaning1 Switch open Normal, no message2 Switch closed Request to exit3 Short circuit RTE line short4 Wire cut RTE line cutDC StatesState Description Meaning1 Switch open When door is locked will generate a door forced alarm2 Switch closed A door forced alarm has been generated then cleared3 Short circuit Door contact line short4 Wire cut Door contact line cut 4 Door Configuration Modes

Field Selection MeaningNormal Door contact, RTE mode.RTE No Lock Lock not operated, PIR sensor.Emergency Override Free exit, lock operated, Emergency override.

DoorModes

Emergency Override NoLock

Free exit, no lock operated, Emergency override.

Not used I/P on controller's door channel not used.Reader tamper I/P on the controller's door channel used for

reader tamper on Wiegand or Magstripe readers.Bolt door I/P on the controller's door channel is used to bolt

the door when the input is active (i.e. access isdenied to all users except those with bolt doorprivileges).NoteA door that is usually open due to a time profilewill be bolted.

Emergency override I/P on the controller's door channel is used togenerate an emergency override and unlock thedoor.

Latch contact I/P on the controller's door channel is used todetect lock latching.

AuxiliaryInputModes(512 only)

General input I/P on the controller's door channel is used for aspecial-to-project purpose.

Not used The alarm output relay on the controller is notused.

Door left open alarm 1 The output relay on the controller is activated ifthe door has been left open.

Door forced alarm 1 The output relay on the controller is activated ifthe door has been forced open.

AuxiliaryOutputMode(512 only)

Door forced/left open alarm 1 The output relay on the controller is activated ifthe door has been forced open or left open.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 112

Alarm shunt The output relay on the controller is activated forthe door release time if a valid access isdetected.

Time Profile The output relay on the controller is only usedduring a specified time profile.

General Output The alarm output relay on the controller is usedfor a special-to-project purpose.

1 Door monitoring must be enabled.

Controller The name of the controller that the controls the door(automatically entered but can be changed via the Hardwaremodule (see Controller Details section).

Door Monitoring If the check box is selected, door monitoring is enabled. Doorcontacts must be fitted.

Door Open Time The time (in seconds) the door is unlocked after a valid key hasbeen presented to the reader (specified by data entry or byincrements). Door contacts must be fitted.

Logging Mode 1 The type of transactions that will be logged in the event log(selected from a drop-down list).Key presentation - access-authorised events logged when keypresented.Door opened - access-authorised events logged when dooropened after key presentation. If door not opened, user walkedaway event is generated. A door contact must be fitted and doormonitoring set.

Lock Release Time The time (in seconds) allowed for the door to be unlocked after avalid access (specified by data entry or by increments).

Extra Door Time 1 The extra time (in seconds) allowed if the keyholder requiresextra time to get through the door (specified by data entry or byincrements). The Requires Extra Door Time check box must beenabled for the keyholder (see the Keyholder Details section).

Enable Lock Toggle 1 An indication of whether the door remains unlocked after a validkey has been presented, or Request to Exit pressed, and onlylocked when the key is presented again, or Request to Exitpressed again (selected by check box).

Anti-Passback Timeout 2 The timeout period (in minutes) when an anti-passback violationis cancelled (enabled by checkbox and specified by data entry orby increments).NoteIf Timed Passback is enabled, this timeout also specifies theduration of anti-passback.

Timed Passback 2 An indication of whether the timeout period for an anti-passbackviolation is enabled (selected by check box).Notes

1. Anti-passback is implemented on the Entry reader to anarea for the duration of the Anti-Passback Timeout. Thisallows anti-passback to be assigned to a door with onlyone reader (e.g. a Request to Exit switch is used to exitthe area).

2. If anti-passback is in operation on more than one door intoan area and Anti-Passback Timeout is set to differenttimes on each door, the longest Anti-Passback Timeouttimeout period will apply to all doors into the area.

EOL Door Inputs 1 An indication of whether the end-of-line inputs are used allowing

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 113

4-state monitoring of RTE and door contact (selected by checkbox). 3

Failsafe 4 An indication of whether the lock is fail-safe (selected by checkbox). If the check box is not selected, the lock is fail-secure.

Alarm inhibit 4 INHB/DR3 on the controller's door channel is used to inhibit thereaders when the area is armed.

Door Contact Mode/RTEMode

The type of Door Contact/Request to Exit connection (selectedfrom the Mode drop-down list). 5

Mode The type of door to reader connection (selected from a drop downlist). 5

1 512 only; 2 512 on direct channel only; 3 PAC 1100/2100/ 2200 only; 4 link to EOL Door Inputs ;

4 link to Door Configuration ModesThe buttons are described in the Property Page section.To update doors:Click here.Note

To add or delete doors, the appropriate controller must be added or deleted (seeController Details section).

3.15.2.4 Door Auxiliary IO

This tab is not displayed for PAC 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers. Auxiliary IO for PAC1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers is specified as described in the Controller Outputssection.

To display Auxiliary IO information:1. Select the Door module.

2. Select a door in the List View.3. Select the Auxiliary IO tab.

The following can then be specified:Auxiliary Input Mode The use of the auxiliary input (selected from a drop-down list). 1

1 Link to definitions

Auxiliary Output Mode The use of the auxiliary output (selected from a drop-down list). 1

Time Profile The use of the auxiliary output (selected from a drop-down list). 1

Output Type The type of the selected output (specified by drop-down list). 1

Momentary Time 2 The time that the selected output will be on (specified by drop-down list).3 Momentary outputs only

Maximum Activation Time(min) 3

The time in minutes before the selected output will beautomatically turned off; 0 means no maximum activation time(selected by check box and specified by drop-down list if theMaximum Activation Time checkbox is selected).4 Latched outputs only

Cycle Time (s) 4 The total time in seconds for the pulse to cycle on/off (specifiedby data entry or increments).

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 114

5 Pulsed outputs only

Active (%) 4 The period of cycle the selected output is on as % of cycle time(specified by data entry or increments).5 Pulsed outputs only

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To update doors:Click here.Note

To add or delete doors, the appropriate controller must be added or deleted (seeController Details section).

3.15.2.5 Door Alarm Management

To display alarms information:1. Select the Door module.

2. Select an area in the List View.3. Select the Alarms Management tab.

The following can then be specified:Alarm Area The alarm area that should be armed if the door is to be armed

(specified by drop-down list).

If none is specified, the door cannot be armed.

Omit Permitted An indication of whether to allow alarms associated with this doorto be omitted from arming (specified by check box).

Silent Alarm An indication of whether the alarms associated with this door aresilent (specified by check box).

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To update doors:Click here.Note

To add or delete doors, the appropriate controller must be added or deleted (seeController Details section).

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 115

3.15.2.6 Door Security Level

This tab is only displayed in Access by Doors and Security Level mode (see Access Typessections).

To display access information:1. Select the Door module.

2. Select a door in the List View.3. Select the Security Level tab.

The following can then be specified:Default Security Level The security level required to open the door outside the time

profile (specified by data entry or by increments).

Timed Security Level The security level required to open the door during the timeprofile (specified by data entry or by increments).

Time Profile The time profile allocated to the door (specified by a drop-downlist).

NoteA security level of 0 prevents the door being opened at any time by any key.

The buttons are described in the Property Page section.

To update doors:Click here.Note

To add or delete doors, the appropriate controller must be added or deleted (seeController Details section).

3.15.3 Add/Update/Delete a DoorThe appropriate areas, time profiles, controllers and channels must be created first.

• Select the Door module.

To add a door:Doors are automatically created when a new controller is created.

To update a door1. Select a door.

2. Select each tab in turn and enter/update appropriate information (select a property pagefield and press F1 to obtain help).

3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.

To delete a door:

• Doors can only be deleted by deleting its associated controller.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 116

3.16 Video Source3.16.1 Video Source List ViewThe Video Source List View displays a list of configured video sources. Selecting a videosource will cause the Video Source Property Page to display its settings.

3.16.2 Video Source Property Page3.16.2.1 Video Source Property Page

The Video Source Property Page is used to create and manage connections to video sources.

A video source is a channel for getting live or recorded video into the system. It can be either acamera, such as a web cam, or IP camera or an input channel on a more complex device suchas a digital source video recorder.

To display the video source property page:1. Select the Video Sources module.

2. Select a video source in the List View orselect the New button.

.

The following can then be specified:Name The name of the video source (specified by data entry).

Description A description of the video source (specified by data entry).

Type The type of video source (selected from a drop-down list).

To add / update / delete a video source:

• Click here.

To configure a video source:

• Click here.

3.16.2.2 Add/Update/Delete a Video Source

• Select the Video Source module.

To add a video source:1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.

2. Select the required camera type, click the Configure button and enter the camera addressand press F1 to obtain help).

3. Select Add.

To update a video source:1. Select a video source.

2. Modify the video source properties as required.

3. Select Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or select Cancel to discard changes.

To delete a video source:1. Select a video source, and click the Configure button.

2. Select Delete or press Ctrl-D.

3. Select OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the video source.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 117

3.16.3 Video Sources - Configure3.16.3.1 Configuring Video SourcesVideo sources are configured using the Configure Video Source window, which is displayedby clicking the Configure button on the Video Source Property Page.The Configure Video Source window has two tabs: General and Presets.3.16.3.2 Video Sources - General TabThis tab is used to1. Configure the connection to the video source that was created in the Video Source

Property Page, and2. Display the feed from a configured camera.To display general video source information:1. Select the Video Sources module.2. Select a video source in the List View or

select the New button.3. Select the Configure button.4. If necessary, select the General tab.

The following can then be specified:Name The name of the video source (specified by data entry).Description The description of the video source (specified by data entry).Address The address of the video source (specified by data entry and

selecting the Connect button).User (optional) The user name required by the source in order to connect to it

(specified by data entry).Password (optional) The password required by the source in order to connect to it

(specified by data entry).In addition to these options, other options may be displayed which are dependant upon the typeof video source being configured.Web / LAN Image

Interval (ms) The refresh rate of the video display (specified by increments ordata entry).

Axis IP CameraPTZ If this checkbox is selected, the video source being configured

has Pan, Tilt and Zoom functionality and enables the View tab inthe Preset tab.

IntividCamera The camera associated with the Intivid DVR unit (selected from a

drop-down list after it has been connected).PTZ 1 If this checkbox is selected, the video source being configured

has Pan, Tilt and Zoom functionality and enables the View tab inthe Preset tab.1 Only if camera has PTZ facilities.

To confirm the specification, select the OK button.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 118

3.16.3.3 Video Sources - Presets Tab

The Presets tab is used to configure presets for a video source.

The left hand side of the tab contains a list of presets, and the right hand side displays severaltabs that are used to configure the selected preset. The tabs available are: General, View (ifthe source supports PTZ) and Alarm Points.

The tabs General and Alarm Points are available for all three of the supported camera types(Axis IP Camera, Web / LAN Image and Intvid).

In addition to the General and Alarm Points tabs, a third tab View , is only available for videosources that support PTZ.

PresetsA preset is an alarm point and / or view that is associated with the selected video source, andis used in the Alarm Viewer application. Three different types of preset exist:

1. Alarm Point Preset - an association of an alarm point with a video source. Selecting thispreset in the Alarm Viewer application will cause the associated video feed to be displayedin the Video Source area.

2. Preset- an definition of a PTZ setting for a video source. Selecting this preset in the AlarmViewer Application will cause the video source to move to the PTZ position specified. Thisoption is only available for video sources that use PTZ.

3. Alarm Point and View Preset - an association of an alarm point and PTZ settings with avideo source. Selecting this preset in the Alarm Viewer Application will:

a. cause the associated video feed to be displayed in the Video Source area.

b. cause the video source to move to the PTZ position specified by that views

Adding and Deleting PresetsPresets are added and deleted using the Add and Delete buttons located on the right hand sideof the Presets tab.

3.16.3.4 Presets Tab - General Tab

A description of the Presets facility is given in the Video Sources - Presets Tab section.

To display general presets information:1. Select the Video Sources module.

2. Select a video source in the List View orselect the New button.

3. Select the Configure button.

4. Select the Presets tab.

5. If necessary, select the General tab.

The following can then be specified:Name The name of the preset (specified by data entry).

Description The description of the preset (specified by data entry).

To confirm the specification, select the OK button.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 119

3.16.3.5 Presets Tab - View Tab

This tab is only available if the video source being configured supports PTZ.

A description of the Presets facility is given in the Video Sources - Presets Tab section.

This tab is used to specify the pan, tilt and zoom settings of the preset. The horizontal scrollbars control the camera's panning. The vertical scroll bar is used to control the camera's tilting,and the slide bar located next to the vertical toolbar is used to set the camera's zoom level.Better control can be achieved by clicking or dragging the mouse on the video window, andusing the scroll wheel.

To display view information:1. Select the Video Sources module.

2. Select a video source in the List View orselect the New button.

3. Select the Configure button.

4. Select the Presets tab.

5. If necessary, select the View tab.

The Set button is used to set the PTZ preset to the camera's current position.

The Reset button is used to return the camera to the default PTZ settings.

To confirm the specification, select the OK button.

3.16.3.6 Presets Tab - Alarm Points

A description of the Presets facility is given in the Video Sources - Presets Tab section.

This tab is used to associate an alarm point with the selected preset.

In the Alarm Viewer, clicking on an alarm point, that has been configured in this tab, will causethe CCTV region to display video from the associated source, and will PTZ to the presetspecified in the View tab (if available).

To display alarm points information:1. Select the Video Sources module.

2. Select a video source in the List View orselect the New button.

3. Select the Configure button.

4. Select the Presets tab.

5. If necessary, select the Alarm Points tab.

The Add button is used to add an alarm point selected from a drop-down list.

The Delete button is used to delete the selected alarm point.

To confirm the specification, select the OK button.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 120

3.17 Reports3.17.1 Report FacilitiesThe reports available are described in the Reports Provided section. When displayed, thereport will be populated with the current data in the Administration Software database.Custom reports can be created using Crystal Reports and added to the system as described inthe Add a Custom Report section.

When selecting a report that requests search parameters, it is strongly recommendedto specify search criteria that will not generate an excessive amount of data that willtake a long time to process.

To display a report:1. Select the Reports tab in the Explorer

bar.

2. Select a report to display.

3. If a Report Search Parameters window isdisplayed, see the Report SearchParameters section.

To print a report:1. Select the Print Setup button and the

Windows Print Setup window isdisplayed.

2. Select the printer and print options andselect OK.

3. Select the Print button or icon.

To close the report:

• Select the Close button.

The report has the following toolbar:The Close Current View icon is not used.

The Print Report icon prints the displayed report.

The Export Report icon exports the report to a different format which canthen be saved, see Export a Report section.

The Size icon displays the report in the selected size.

The Go to First Page icon displays first page of the report.

The Go to Previous Page icon steps backwards through the reportpages.

The Page Number icon displays the current page and total number ofpages.

The Go to Next Page icon steps forwards through the report pages.

The Go to Last Page icon displays the last page of the report.

The Stop Loading icon stops loading the report and is only applicable tolarge reports that are taking a long time to display.

The Search icon searches for specified text in the report.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 121

3.17.2 Reports ProvidedThe following reports are provided when applicable:Note

Some reports require search parameters to be specified (see the Report SearchParameters section).

17-Week Average - Detail A detailed break down of the time worked by a specified keyholder orkeyholders over a specified 17-week period and determinescompliance to the Working Time (Amendment) Regulations 2003Statutory Instrument 2003 No. 1684. A warning is displayed if theaverage working time exceeds 48 hours or if the working time inany week exceeds 60 hours.

If entry and exit areas are not specified, the report will calculate thedifference between the earliest and latest access events for each day.

17-Week Average -Summary

A summary of the time worked by a specified keyholder or keyholdersover a specified 17-week period and determines compliance to theWorking Time (Amendment) Regulations 2003 StatutoryInstrument 2003 No. 1684. A warning is displayed if the 48 hourweekly average is exceeded.

If entry and exit areas are not specified, the report will calculate thedifference between the earliest and latest access events for each day.

2100/2200 Door AccessHistory

A list of specified keyholders who have accessed specified doorscontrolled by PAC 1100/2100/2200 series door controllers betweenspecified dates.

Access Groups A list of specified access groups and associated time profiles andareas.

Area Access History A list of areas accessed by a specified keyholder between specifieddates.

Area Authorisation A list of specified areas and associated keyholders with their accessgroups and time profiles.

Area Usage A list of specified keyholders and their area usage.

Areas A list of specified areas and associated doors.

Attendance A list of specified keyholders and times they entered and left an area oropened a door. The report will calculate the difference between theearliest and latest access events for each day.Note

This report indicates when a key has been used to enter andleave an area but will not detect when a keyholder has tailgatedinto or out of an area or used a Request to Exit switch.

Categories A list of keyholder categories and associated area usage.

Channels A list of all communication channels and associated details andsettings.

Channels (500) A list of specified 500 TCP/IP channels and associated details andsettings.

Controller Barcode A controller barcode table of probed controllers.

Dead Keys A list of keyholders who have not used their keys after a specified date.

Door Controller Summary A list of all probed access controllers arranged by channel withassociated channel protocol type and controller firmware version.

Doors A list of all doors and associated details, configuration and access.

Event Alarm History A list of alarms generated between specified dates.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 122

Events A list of the events for specified criteria.

Excessive Key Use A list of keys that have been used more than a specified number oftimes within a specified period.

Holiday Profiles A list of all holiday profiles and associated holiday periods.

Key Expiry A list of keyholders whose keys expired on or after a specified date.

Keyholder Authorisation A list of specified keyholders and associated authorisation (see ReportSearch Parameters section).

Keyholder Images A list of keyholder photos and signatures that satisfy a specified searchcriteria.

Keyholder List A list of keyholders that satisfy a specified search criteria.

Keyholders A list of specified keyholders and associated details.

Last 2100/2200 DoorAccessed

A list of specified doors controlled by PAC 1100/2100/2200 series doorcontrollers accessed by specified keyholders and the time accessedon the present date.Note

This report indicates when a key has been presented to a door'sreader but will not detect when a keyholder has tailgated into orout of an area or used a Request to Exit switch.

Last Area Access A list of specified areas accessed by specified keyholders and the timeaccessed on the present date.Note

This report indicates when a key has been presented to a door'sreader but will not detect when a keyholder has tailgated into orout of an area or used a Request to Exit switch.

Modems A list of modems attached to the PC and associated details.

Operators A list of all operators and associated details.

Offline Controllers A list of connected offline controllers associated details.

512 Controllers I/O A list of access controllers on specified 500 channel(s) and details oftheir inputs and outputs.

512 Controllers A list of specified access controllers and associated details, limits anddoors.

2100/2200 Controllers A list of specified door controllers and associated details, limits anddoors.

520/ 530 Controllers A list of input and output controllers on specified 500 channel(s)anddetails of their inputs and outputs.

Time & Mode Profiles A list of selected time and mode profiles and associated time periods.

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 123

3.17.3 Report Search ParametersSome reports require search criteria to display relevant information (e.g. a list of keyholders).When such a report is selected the Report Search Parameters window is displayed (e.g. onlylist keyholders with the surname Smith).

Notes1. When selecting a report that requests search parameters, it is strongly recommended to

specify search criteria that will not generate an excessive amount of data that will take along time to process.

2. To get the best from the Attendance, 17 Week Average (Detailed), 17 Week Average(Summary) reports, follow this recommendation:

• When specifying an entry and exit area, ensure that the keyholder accesses thoseareas at appropriate times to ensure accurate data is generated. If entry and exitareas are not specified, the report will calculate the difference between the earliestand latest area access times.

To specify report search parameters:1. Select the Reports tab in the Explorer

bar.

2. Select a report to display.

3. If report search parameters are required, aReport Search Parameters window isdisplayed.

4. Select the search parameters:

• Select a search parameter on the left

and the button and the searchparameters is added to the reportsearch options.

• Select the button and all searchparameters are added to the reportsearch options.

• Select the button and all searchparameters are removed from the reportsearch options..

• Select a search parameter on the right

and the button and the searchparameter is removed from the reportsearch options.

NoteMandatory search parameters cannot beremoved.

5. Select each search parameter in turn andspecify the required search criteria.Wildcards * (used to substitute zero ormore characters) and ? (used to substitutea single character) can be used in dataentry fields). Some fields cannot bechanged.

6. If you want to create a report that alwaysuses the same search criteria, select the

Administration Software

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 124

Save button and enter a name for thereport.

7. Select the Search button.

3.17.4 Export a ReportTo export a report:1. Display a report.

2. Select the icon and the Exportwindow is displayed.

The following can then be specified:Format The format to export to (selected from a drop-down list).

Destination The destination of the export (selected from a drop-down list):

Application Exports the report to a temp file in the specified format and then opensthe file in the appropriate application.

The file name of the report and the file name of the temp file cannot bethe same.

When exporting in Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) format, the'application' and the 'disk file' are the same, so the destination is notspecified. The ODBC data source must be set up through ODBCAdministrator in order for the program to export to a particular ODBCdatabase format.

When exporting in HTML format, a file path is requested.

Disk File Saves the report to the specified disk or diskette.

Lotus cc:Mail(VIM)

Exports the report to a mail message.

The character-separated values (separator and delimiter), mail number,date format and password are requested.

LotusDomino

Exports the report to the specified Lotus Domino server.

Version 3.0 or later of the Lotus Domino client is required and, at aminimum, depositor access. Export to a Lotus Domino OS/2 client is notpossible.

MicrosoftMail (MAPI)

Exports the report to a mail message.

The formatting options depending on the format selected are requested.

NoteThe report can be exported to Crystal Reports.

3.17.5 Add a Custom ReportA report can be created using Crystal Reports and can access the Administration Softwaredatabase to display current data. The report files can be created and tested in the Customfolder or added using Reports > Custom Report Manager.For further information on creating reports, contact Technical Support.

Image Capture

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 125

4. Image Capture4.1 Image Capture IntroductionThe Image Capture Utility is used to capture images from files, Video for Windows devices andTWAIN devices, for use in the Signature and Photo image fields in the Keyholder property page.

To capture an image:1. Select the Keyholders module.

2. Select a keyholder in the List View.

• To capture a photo image,select the Details tab andCapture button at the bottom ofthe photo frame.

• To capture a signature imageselect the Personal Details taband Capture button at thebottom of the signature frame.

Click here for information on using the Image Capture Utility.

4.2 Using the Image Capture UtilityImage Capture Utility is divided into two panes: Capture Source and Preview Window.

Capture SourceThis area is used to select an image file, or an item of hardware to be used to capture animage.

Click here for more information.

Preview WindowThis area displays the image that was captured / is being captured using the capture source,allowing the image to be cropped before placing it into the keyholder record.

Click here for more information.

4.3 Capture SourceThere are three tabs displayed in this area: File, TWAIN and Video.

FileThis tab is used to select an image file from a local or network location.

A Windows explorer style "tree" is displayed that is used to navigate to, and select an image file.The image files displayed in the tree are determined by the filter options set in the Show FileTypes pulldown list beneath the tree. By default this is set to all supported file types.

The selected image file is displayed in the Preview Window.

TWAINThis tab displays a list of TWAIN compatible image capture devices, for example, scanners anddigital cameras. Before selecting an image capture device ensure that it is correctly configured(you may need to refer to its documentation).

Select the required TWAIN device and click the Acquire Image button - the video or scan will bedisplayed in a separate window (follow the instructions for your imaging device to capture thedesired image). The captured image will be displayed in the Preview Window.

VideoThis tab displays a list of Video for Windows compatible devices, for example webcams. Beforeselecting a Video device ensure that it is correctly configured (you may need to refer to its

Image Capture

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 126

documentation).

Select the required Video for Windows device to view its live image feed in the PreviewWindow.

Click the Freeze button to freeze the display in the Preview Window.

4.4 Preview WindowThis area displays the image that was selected or captured from the Capture Source area, andis used to place the image into the keyholder’s Photo or Signature field.

Images displayed in this area may first be cropped before being captured (placed) into thekeyholder record.

Importing an image uncroppedBy default the Show Crop Box option is enabled. Uncheck the Show Crop Box option andthen click the Capture button.Note

A cropped image will have the same aspect ratio as the area it will be displayed in and isdisplayed correctly. Uncropped images may not have the appropriate aspect ratio andmay therefore be displayed incorrectly.

Cropping an imageEnsure the Show Crop Box option is checked. Cropping an image will preserve only theselected part of it - allowing background, unnecessary detail, etc to be removed.

To define the crop area: click and drag anywhere on the captured image to insert a crop box. Itmay then be resized by clicking with primary mouse button on the boundary box and dragging.

The shape of the crop box is determined from where the Image Capture Utility is launched from:

Photo Crop box ratio 3:4

Signature Crop box ration 3:1

After an area has been selected click the Crop Button.

Placing an image into a keyholder recordWhen you have cropped the selected image, or removed the crop box, click the Capture Buttonat the bottom of the Preview Window area to insert it into the keyholder record.

ID Card Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 127

5. ID Card Designer5.1 Card Designer IntroductionThe ID Card Designer is used to design ID cards. Each design for an ID card is associated witha Keyholder Category - assigning a category will associate a specific card design to akeyholder.

5.1.1 Displaying the Card Designer

The ID Card Designer can launched from the following locations:

1. Selecting ID-Card Designer in the Tools tab pf the Explorer bar.

2. Selecting the ID-Card Designer icon located in the Categories tab of theOrganisation Options window (Tools > Options menu)

3. Selecting the Tools > Card Designer menu.

5.1.2 Interactive MapClick here to view an interactive map of the ID-Card Designer.

5.2 Card Designer Menus5.2.1 Design MenuThe Design menu contains the following items:

Import - If the file to be imported was exported as a selected items, it will be imported onto thecurrent card face. If the file to be imported was exported as a design, it will replace the currentID-Card design.

Export - Two export options are displayed:

1. Selection - Exports the selected items or the selected card face to a file in thespecified location.

2. Design - Exports the entire ID-Card to the specified location.

Update - Updates (saves) the current ID-Card.

Exit - Exits the Card Designer without saving changes.

5.2.2 Edit MenuThe Edit Menu contains the following items:

Cut - cuts the item(s) selected on the Main View. This function is also available in the Toolbar.

Copy - copies the item(s) selected on the Main View. This function is also available in theToolbar.

Paste - pastes the item(s) that has been cut or copied. This function is also available in theToolbar.

Delete - deletes the item(s) selected This function is also available in the Toolbar.

Select All - selects all items on the card face.

Card Face Properties - selecting this item will cause the Properties Region to display theproperties of the selected card face.

Align to Grid - click here.

Bring to Front - click here.

Send to Back - click here.

Group Items - groups the selected items. Click here for more information.

Ungroup Items - ungroups the selected group. Click here for more information.

ID Card Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 128

5.2.3 View MenuThe menu contains the following items:

Units - selects the scale used by the Ruler. The scale can also be changed by the RulerContext Menu.

1. None (turns of the ruler, e.g. for "not to scale diagrams")

2. Inches,

3. Millimetres,

4. Centimetres,

5. Metres.

Zoom - Displays a submenu which allows you to change the card face zoom level.

Small Icons - this item toggles between small and large icons for all items in the Toolbars andAdd Items Region.

5.2.4 Help MenuSelecting the item Contents displays the ID Card Designer helpfile.

5.3 Toolbar, Browser and Status Bar5.3.1 Card Designer ToolbarThe ID-Card designer toolbar contains the following items:

Select Enables select mode, which is used to select single or multiple itemson the card face. Click here for more information.

ZoomAllows the user to zoom in and zoom out on the card face view byusing mouse buttons, keys or the mouse wheel. Click here for moreinformation.

Cut Cut the selected item or card face. This function is also available inthe Edit Menu.

Copy Copy the selected item or card face. This function is also available inthe Edit Menu.

Paste Paste the item or card face which has been cut or copied. Thisfunction is also available in the Edit Menu.

Delete Delete the selected item or card face. This function is also availablein the Edit Menu.

PrintThis will print the current design using the specified printer.

Click here for information about double sided printing.

Preview This will display a window containing a print preview of the currentdesign using the specified printer.

Zoom in Increase the magnification of the card face. Click here for moreinformation.

Zoom out Decrease the magnification of the card face. Click here for moreinformation.

Show Full CardFace

Decrease the magnification so that the full card face will bedisplayed. This function is also available in the View Menu.

Bring to Front Sends the selected item to the front of the card face - click here formore information.

ID Card Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 129

Send to Back Sends the selected item to the back of the card face - click here formore information.

Group Groups the selected items. Click here for more information.

Ungroup Items Ungroups the selected group. Click here for more information.

5.3.2 Card Designer Browser

The Keyholder/Category Browser toolbar (pictured above) is used to:

1. Select an ID-Card design to edit. which will be displayed in the Card Design region.

2. Select a keyholder associated with the selected category, which causes the carddesign to display its data items populated with the keyholder's relevant details.

5.3.3 Card Designer Status BarThe status bar, located at the bottom of the ID Card Designer application, displays the followinginformation :

1. X and Y coordinates of the mouse pointer, in the selected units for the card face.

2. Item Size - the size in the specified units of the item selected on the card face.

3. Mode Selected - the icon displayed here reflects the item that has been selected in theAdd Area or Toolbar. For example it displays a picture of magnifying glass and the word"zoom" if zoom mode is selected, a shape icon and the word "shape" if shapes areselected etc.

4. Operator Name - the name of the operator currently logged on.

5. Zoom Level - the current level of magnification.

5.4 Design Regions5.4.1 Add Items RegionThis region contains the following items that are used to and create designs on the selectedcard face.

ShapeThis is used to create shapes; the default is a square. Six other shapes areavailable by changing the items Shape Properties.

Click here to view a shape item's properties.

ImageThis is used to create frames which display the image file specified in its ImageProperty.

Click here to view an image item's properties.

LineThis is used to create lines on the card face whose thickness is specified using theLine Width Property.

Click here to view its properties.

TextThis is used to create a box which displays the text specified by its Text Properties.

Click here to view its properties.

TitleThis is used to create a title on the card face.

Click here to view its properties.

ID Card Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 130

First NameThis is used to create a first name on the card face.

Click here to view its properties.

InitialsThis is used to create an initials on the card face.

Click here to view its properties.

Last NameThis is used to create a last name on the card face.

Click here to view its properties.

Date ofBirth

This is used to create a date of birth on the card face.

Click here to view its properties.

EmployeeNumber

This is used to create an employee number on the card face.

Click here to view its properties.

PhotoThis item displays a keyholder photo (if one is present) when a keyholder isselected in the Card Designer Browser.

Click here to view its properties.

SignatureThis item displays a keyholder signature (if one is present) when a keyholder isselected in the Card Designer Browser.

Click here to view its properties.

5.4.1.1 Creating Designs

Click here for more information on using any of the above items to create designs.

5.4.1.2 ID-Card Design Overview

Click here for more information.

5.4.2 Card Face RegionThis region is where the ID-Card is designed by using items from the Add Items Region.

5.4.2.1 Selecting Card Faces

To select a card face click a tab, which are located above the current card face,

5.4.2.2 Mouse Coordinates

The coordinates of the mouse pointer on the page are displayed in the Status Bar.

5.4.2.3 Card Face Properties

The selected card face has the following properties:

Name Snap Grid Colour

Units Holopatch

Background Colour Smart Card

Background Image Magnetic Stripe

Snap Grid Orientation

Snap Grid Size

5.4.2.4 Rulers

The rulers on the selected card face can have their units changed from:

1. the View Menu, or

2. the Units Property of the Card Face Properties, or

3. the rulers Context Menu.

ID Card Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 131

5.4.2.5 Viewing Card Face Properties

To view the card face properties, select it by clicking on any empty area of the card face.

5.4.2.6 Editing Card Face Properties

Click here for more information.

5.4.3 Properties RegionThis region displays the properties of the selected item on the selected page.

The properties of all pages and items in the card design define their appearance and behaviouron the card face. Changes to the properties of items in the card design will be reflected on thecard face.

Click on an entry below to view more information on it.

Shape Properties Multiple Item Properties

Image Properties Group Properties

Line Properties Card Face Properties

Text Properties

5.4.3.1 Editing Item Properties

Click here for more information.

5.4.3.2 Update / Exit

These buttons located beneath the properties area respectively update (save) the ID-Carddesign and exit the application.

5.4.4 Buttons Region5.4.4.1 Assign a Name to this Item

This button is no longer used. To change the name of an item, edit the Name Property.

5.4.4.2 Update Button

Clicking this button will save any changes to the current design.

5.4.4.3 Exit Button

This button will exit the ID-Card Designer. To ensure any changes have been made, click theUpdate button first.

You will be warned if you have not saved your changes when this button is pressed.

ID Card Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 132

5.5 Card Design OverviewDrawing and placing itemsClick here for more information on creating designs.

Editing ID-Card Designs

Select ModeSelect mode is used to edit ID-Card designs.Click here for more information.

Moving, resizing and deletingClick here for more information.

Grouping and ungroupingMerge many items into one item, orbreakdown a group into its constituent parts.Click here for more information.

Context MenusContext Menus are used to edit items.

Viewing PropertiesClick here for more information.

Aligning items to the GridClick here for information.

Rulers and MeasurementClick here for more information.

Ordering items on a card faceClick here for more information.

Docking ItemsClick here for more information.

PropertiesClick here for more information on editing the properties of a card face or an item on the cardface.

Double Sided PrintingClick here for more information on printing double sided ID-cards.

5.5.1 Drawing and Placing ItemsItems from the Add Items Region can be placed on the selected card face by using two differentmethods:

1. Dragging and dropping.

2. Selecting and clicking.

5.5.1.1 Dragging and Dropping

Any item from the Add Items Region can be placed on the selected card face by selecting theitem and dragging it to the required location on the page while holding down the mouse button.

5.5.1.2 Selecting and Clicking

Items can be placed on the selected card face by selecting it, and then clicking on the requiredarea to place it. How an item is placed is dependant upon whether it is a fixed shape item, variable shape item or line.

After selecting an item the ID-Card designer stays in this mode until a different one is selected.The mode is indicated in the Status Bar.

5.5.1.3 Fixed Shape Items

Fixed shape items (indicated above) are items that when placed have a predetermined size,which cannot be changed. However, text items' sizes can be adjusted by using the FontProperty.

ID Card Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 133

To place a fixed shape item select it and click the required area on the card face to place it.

5.5.1.4 Variable Shape Items

Variable shape items (indicated above) are items whose rectangular size is determined byclicking twice on the card face: the first click specifies the location of the item’s top left cornerthe second click specifies the location of the bottom right corner.

5.5.1.5 Line

Lines can be placed in two ways: individually or many.

Individually: After selecting the line item, clicking on the card face defines the line's start pointand releasing it defines its end point.

Many: Selecting the card face will specify a line's start point and clicking a second time willspecify its end point, causing that line to be drawn, clicking a third time will specify the end pointof the next line - the end point of the previous line is start of the current line.

To end drawing press the Escape key, click the Toolbar's select function or right click.

5.5.2 Editing PropertiesThe properties of all items and both ID-card faces in the ID-Card Designer define theirappearance and behaviour. Changes to the properties of anything within the ID-Card DesignEditor will be instantly reflected on the card face.

Item PropertiesTo edit an item's properties you must first be in Select Mode. Click the require item and theProperties Region will display that items properties allowing them to be edited.

ID-Card Face PropertiesTo view and edit the properties of the selected ID-Card face ensure that all items on the faceare unselected.

5.5.3 Grouping and UngroupingWhen the Group command is applied to two or more selected objects, they will behave as ifthey are a single item - clicking on a constituent item will cause the group to be selected, andclicking and dragging a single item will cause all of them to move. Grouped items can be rotatedor docked as a single item.

Grouping ItemsTo group items:

1. Enter Select Mode,

2. Select the required items.

3. Select the group command from any of the following locations: Edit Menu, Toolbar orthe Context Menu of the selected group.

Ungrouping a GroupTo ungroup a group and return it to its constituent components, select it and then use theungroup command from any of the following locations: Edit Menu, Toolbar or the ContextMenu of the selected group.

Resizing GroupsGroups cannot be resized.

ID Card Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 134

5.5.4 Select ModeBefore any item can be moved, resized, group / ungroups or deleted select mode must beentered. To enter select mode click the select item from the Toolbar or click the Esc key.

Note: The current mode of the ID-Card Designer is displayed in the Status Bar.

Selecting ItemsWhen an item or group is selected, its properties will be displayed in the Properties Region.

To select multiple items either:

1. Hold the Shift key down and select the required items.

2. Selecting a blank part of the card face and then dragging will cause a selection areato appear. Any items that fall within the selection area will become selected.

Note: Holding the Ctrl key and clicking a selected item will toggle its selection status.

Select AllTo select all items on the card face, use the select all function by:

1. Selecting the item Select All on the Edit Menu.

2. Holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the key 'A'

PropertiesSelecting any item on the card face will cause the Properties Region to display the properties ofthat item.

5.5.5 Move, Resize and DeleteThis page describes how to perform the listed actions on single items, multiple items orgroups, after entering Select Mode.

1. Move,

2. Resize, or

3. Delete.

MovingSelect an item or group and drag to move it around. Release the button to stop moving it.

ResizingAfter an item has been selected it is enclosed by a rectangular boundary box thathas on each side and corner grab handles.

Solid black grab handles (pictured left top) indicate that the item or group can beresized by click and drag. Outlined grab handles in each corner (pictured leftmiddle) indicate the item cannot be resized by click and drag. The Text Propertiescan be used to allow resizing of text items.

Items with their Aspect Lock Property set to on, have grab handles in the middle ofeach side (picture bottom left), and maintain their aspect ratio when resized.

Notes:Groups cannot be resized.

The size of a Text Item can only be adjusted with the Font Property.

DeletingItems or groups can be deleted from the card face by:

1. Selecting the delete option from its Context Menu, or

2. Selecting it and pressing in the Del key, or

3. Selecting it, dragging it off the main view and releasing the button, or

ID Card Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 135

4. Using the delete function button on the Toolbar, or the Edit Menu.

5.5.6 Printing Double-Sided ID Cards on a Single-Sided ID Card Printer5.5.6.1 Printing from the ID Card Designer

The ID Card designer will only print cards appropriate to the selected category. All of the frontsides for the category will be printed first, followed by all of the back sides.

Printing Double-Sided CardsTo print double-sided ID cards on a single-sided ID Card printer, you must follow the followinginstructions:

1. Load the printer with a enough ID cards to complete the print job.

2. Begin the printing process: select Design Menu > Print, select the required printertype, and click OK.

3. The printing process will begin, shortly afterwards a dialogue will be displayed that willask you if want to begin print the back sides of the ID Cards. You MUST wait until theprinting process for the front sides has finished. Take all of the cards that have beenprinted, and reinsert them into the ID card printer hopper (consult the printer's operationinstructions to determine the correct loading procedure).

4. Click Ok to confirm the back side printing dialogue, and the ID card back side printingwill begin.

5.5.6.2 Batch Printing ID Cards from Keyholder Module

Batch printing is where two or more ID cards are printed in one session. This is done byselecting more than one keyholder and then the File > Print ID Card menu. The keyholdersselected for batch printing may belong to different categories which will require arranging forprinting:

1. All double-sided ID cards, in alphabetic order, all front sides for the category, followedby all back sides.

2. All single-sided ID cards, in alphabetic order.

For example: If many categories of card holder are printed, the front side of all the firstcategory of double-sided ID cards will be printed first, followed by the back side of the firstcategory; this will be repeated for all double-sided categories, and then will move onto singleside categories.

Printing Double-Sided CardsTo print double-sided ID cards on a single-sided ID Card printer, you must follow the followinginstructions:

1. Load the printer with a enough ID cards to complete the print job.

2. Select the required keyholder entries from the keyholder list view, and to print them:

o Select File Menu > Print ID Card, select the required printer type, and clickOK, or

o Right click any of the selected keyholder entries, select Print ID Card, selectthe required printer type, and select OK.

3. Begin the printing process: select Design Menu > Print, select the required printertype, and click OK.

4. The printing process will begin, shortly afterwards a while a dialogue will be displayedthat will ask you if want to begin print the back sides of the ID Cards. You MUST waituntil the printing process for the front sides has finished. Take all of the cards that havebeen printed, and reinsert them into the ID card printer hopper (consult the printer'soperation instructions to determine the correct loading procedure).

5. Click Ok to confirm the back side printing dialogue, and the ID card back side printingwill begin.

ID Card Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 136

After the first category has been printed, the next category will begin printed and so on until thefinal category has been completed.

5.6 Item Properties5.6.1 Multiple Item PropertiesWhen multiple items are selected on the page, the Properties Region displays a set ofproperties common to all of the selected items. When these common properties are edited, therespective property for each item will be changed as well.

When two or more items are selected the following properties are displayed:

The following properties are displayed when multiple items are selected:

Aspect Lock Shadow

Anchor Density

Angle Shadow X

Transparency Shadow Y

Editing the Item's PropertiesClick here for more information.

5.6.2 Group ItemA group item is two or more items that have been grouped using the group command. A groupitem has the following properties:

X Transparency

Y Shadow

Anchor Density

Angle Shadow Y

Aspect Lock Shadow X

Creating a GroupTo create a group, you must select two or more items on the card face, and use the groupcommand on the Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.

Ungrouping a GroupTo ungroup a group, you must select the required group, and use the ungroup command onthe Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.

Editing Group PropertiesAny changes made to the properties of a group will be applied to the relevant properties of itsconstituent items.

Click here for more information on editing groups.

Resizing a GroupGroups cannot be resized.

5.6.3 Shape Item PropertiesA shape selected on a page has the following properties:

Name Shape

X Fill Colour

Y Border Colour

Width Line Width

Height Shadow

ID Card Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 137

Aspect Lock Density

Anchor Shadow X

Angle Shadow Y

Transparency

Editing the Item's PropertiesClick here for more information.

5.6.4 Image Item / Photo Item / Signature Item PropertiesImage Item, Photo Item and Signature Item have the following common properties:

Name Anchor

X Angle

Y Shadow

Width Density

Height Shadow X

Aspect Lock Shadow Y

Image ItemIn addition to the above properties an image item also has the following additional property:Image

Photo Item / Signature ItemsIn addition to the above properties photo and signature items have the following additionalproperty: Image Data Property

Editing the Item's PropertiesClick here for more information.

5.6.5 Line Item PropertiesA line has the following properties:

Name Colour

X Line Width

Y Shadow

Width Density

Height Shadow X

Anchor Shadow Y

Transparency

Aligning to AxisA line can be aligned to the closest axis (straightened) by selecting Align to Axis from theContext Menu.

Editing the Item's PropertiesClick here for more information.

5.6.6 Text Item / Text Data PropertiesA text item selected on a card face has the following properties:

Name Multiline

X Colour

Y Shadow

ID Card Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 138

Anchor Density

Angle Shadow X

Transparency Shadow Y

Font

Text Item PropertyIn addition to the above properties a text item also has the property: Text instead of the textdata property.

Data Item PropertyIn addition to the above properties a text data item also has the property Data Field instead ofthe text property.

Editing the Item's PropertiesClick here for more information.

5.7 Individual Properties5.7.1 Name PropertyThe name of the item. This is can be edited and is used if the item is to be linked to other itemsand is only required when configuring the Action Property.

5.7.2 Units PropertiesAllows the user to select the units that the card face is displaying values in. Click here.

5.7.3 Background PropertiesBackground ColourClick the button on right hand side to display the colour picker that selects the card face'sbackground colour.

Background imageClick the button on right hand side to display the Open File dialog. This will allow you tonavigate to, and select a graphic file, which will be displayed on the map's selected side. Thefile formats BMP, GIF, JPG, JPEG, PNG, TIFF, TIF and WMF are supported.

Removing an ImageTo remove an image from a card face background or from an image item without deleting it(i.e. leaving an empty frame), select the image property and press the delete key.

5.7.4 Snap PropertiesSnap GridThere are three options associated with this property:

1. No snap grid - no grid / dots displayed. This option disables the "snap to" when placingitems.

2. Snap only - items snap to an invisible grid. The size of the grid is determined by theSnap Grid Size property (see below).

3. Grid - displays a grid on the card face which items snap to. The size of the grid isdetermined by the Snap Grid Size property (see below).

Snap Grid SizeSets the scale used by the displayed grid / dots in the units specified in the Units Properties.

Snap Grid ColourSets the colour of the grid. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display will display acolour selector.

ID Card Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 139

Preventing Snap to GridTo prevent items snapping to the grid when moving them, hold down the Shift key when movingthem.

5.7.5 Holopatch / Magstripe / Smart Card Properties5.7.5.1.1 Holopatch

This property has the following values selected from a drop-down list:

1. Off - (default) Holopatch not displayed.

2. Show - displays a square on the front of the Card Design, that indicates the location ofa standard holopatch. Items beneath it remain visible.

3. Punch Out - displays a white square on the front of the Card Design. Items beneath itare not visible and not printed.

5.7.5.1.2 Magstripe

This property has the following values selected from a drop-down list:

1. Off - (default) Magstripe not displayed.

2. Show - displays a rectangle on the Card Design back, indicating the location of amagstripe on a standard card. Items beneath it remain visible.

3. Punch Out - displays a solid white rectangle on the Card Design back. Items beneath itare not visible and not printed.

5.7.5.1.3 Smartcard

This property has the following values selected from a drop-down list:

1. Off - (default) Smartcard not displayed.

2. Show - displays a square on the Card Design front, indicating the location of a the chipon a standard smartcard. Items beneath it remain visible.

3. Punch Out- displays a white square on the Card Design front. Items beneath it are notvisible and not printed.

5.7.6 OrientationThis property toggles the orientation of the selected face between landscape and portrait.NoteIn order to change the orientation of a card, items on the card design that would no longer bevisible are deleted after changing the orientation. If such a situation occurs, a prompt to confirmthe orientation change will be displayed.

5.7.7 X, Y, Width and Height PropertiesXThe distance, in the selected units, of the item's origin from the left side of the card face. Theorigin location is set using the item's Anchor Property.

YThe distance, in the selected units, of the item's origin the item from the top of the card face.The origin location is set using the item's Anchor Property.

WidthThe width of the object, in the selected units.

HeightThe height of the object, in the selected units.

ID Card Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 140

5.7.8 Aspect Lock PropertyThe Aspect Lock Property determines how a shape changes when it is resized using themouse.

Aspect Lock OffObject's right side is clicked and dragged.

Note how the grab handles' position differ from the Aspect Lock Onsetting.

Aspect Lock On - item retains aspect ratio when resized.

Object's right side is clicked and dragged.

Note how the grab handles' position differs from the Aspect Lock Offsetting.

5.7.9 Anchor and Angle Properties5.7.9.1 Anchor

The Anchor Property controls where, in the selected item, its origin is located. The origin isthe point which it rotates around, and whose location determines the shape's X and Ycoordinate properties.

top left

left

bottom left

top

centre

bottom

top right

right

bottom right

The image below shows examples of how the alignment properties affect an item when it isrotated 45 degrees clockwise . The red dot indicates the shape's origin.

Horizontal alignment: centreVertical alignment: centreHorizontal alignment: rightVertical alignment: bottom

Horizontal alignment: leftVertical alignment: centre

5.7.9.2 Angle

Entering a value will rotate the shape around its origin. A positive value will rotate the itemclockwise, and a negative anticlockwise.

5.7.10 Transparency PropertyA value between 0 (opaque) and 100 (transparent).

ID Card Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 141

5.7.11 Shape PropertiesShapeThe type of shape the selected item is: Circle, Square, Triangle, Star, Pentagon, Hexagon orBurst.Fill ColourSets the colour of the selected item's fill. Clicking on the button on the right side of the displaywill display a colour selector.

Border ColourSets the colour of the selected item's border. Clicking on the button on the right side of thedisplay will display a colour selector.

5.7.12 Text PropertiesText entered here will be displayed in the text item on the card face. The text item can be isresized using the Font property.

5.7.12.1 Font

This property controls the appearance of the text in the selected item.

Clicking the button on the right hand side displays the font editor, that is used to select fonttype, font style, font size, font effect and scripting.

5.7.12.2 Multi-Line

Setting this property to On will allow a text box to be resized, whilst setting it to OFF prevents atext box from being resized.

5.7.12.3 Colour

Sets the colour of the text. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display will display acolour selector.

5.7.13 Line Properties5.7.13.1 Line Width

This property sets the line thickness of the selected:

1. Line (for lines), or

2. Border (for shapes).

The default value is 1. Setting this value to 0 will turn the line off.

5.7.13.2 Colour

Sets the colour of the line or border. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display willdisplay a colour selector.

5.7.14 Image PropertyThis property is used to choose the image file that an item displays.

If the image property is specified as a background image for a card face, it will expand to fillthe card face, and cannot be resized.

If the image property is specified as an image for an image item, the image will be sized to fitthe image frame, and may therefore appear distorted. An image can be adjusted by using theimage items Context Menu.

Click the button on right hand side to display the Open File dialog. This will allow you tonavigate to, and select a graphic file, which will be displayed within the boundary box of theimage item. The file formats BMP, GIF, JPG, JPEG, PNG, TIFF, TIF and WMF are supported.

ID Card Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 142

5.7.15 Shadow PropertiesShadowToggles shadow visibility.

Shadow XThe horizontal offset of a shadow. A positive value will cause the shadow to be displayed to theright of the item.

Shadow YThe vertical offset of a shadow. A positive value will cause the shadow to be displayed belowthe item.

Shadow DensityThe darkness of the shadow: 0 will make it invisible, and a value of 100 makes it black. Bydefault this value is set to 20 (light gray).

5.7.16 Colour PropertiesColour PropertySets the colour of the selected item. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display willdisplay a colour selector.

Fill Colour PropertySets the fill colour of the selected item. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display willdisplay a colour selector.

5.7.17 Data Field PropertyThis property specifies the keyholder database field that will populate the text data item orphoto/signature item when the ID-Card is printed or when a keyholder is selected from the CardDesigner Browser.

The database fields available are:1. Date of Birth2. Email3. Employee Number4. First Name5. Home Telephone6. Initials7. Last name8. Mobile Telephone9. Start Time Date10. Title11. Work Telephone12. Keyholder Extra Information fields 1 - 5 - these values are only available if they are

defined in the Keyholder Extra Information tab of the Organisation Options window,selected from the Tools Menu.

The photo/signature fields available are:13. Photo14. Signature

ID Card Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 143

5.8 Group Item Properties5.8.1 Group Item PropertiesA group item is two or more items that have been grouped using the group command. A groupitem has the following properties:

X Transparency

Y Shadow

Anchor Density

Angle Shadow Y

Aspect Lock Shadow X

5.8.2 Creating a GroupTo create a group, you must select two or more items on the card face, and use the groupcommand on the Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.

5.8.3 Ungrouping a GroupTo ungroup a group, you must select the required group, and use the ungroup command onthe Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.

5.8.4 Editing Group PropertiesAny changes made to the properties of a group will be applied to the relevant properties of itsconstituent items.

Click here for more information on editing groups.

5.8.5 Resizing a GroupGroups cannot be resized.

5.9 Context MenusContext menus are displayed by right clicking on an item.

Click on a link below to view the Context Menu associated with an item.

Single items - shapes, text group

Single items - line ruler

Single item - image card face

multiple items

5.9.1 Card FaceThe card face context menu contains the following items:

1. Cut - cuts the selected page.

2. Copy - copies the selected page.

3. Paste - pastes the copied or cut page -only displayed when a page has been cut orcopied.

4. Delete - deletes the selected page.

5. Zoom in - click here.

6. Zoom out - click here.

7. Show Full Card Face- this causes the card face view to fill the entire page.

8. Help - displays the help page (from this help file) associated with the selected item(s).

ID Card Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 144

5.9.2 RulerThe Ruler context menu allows the units used by the selected card face to be set, and containsthe following items:

1. Inches,

2. Millimetres,

3. Centimetres,

4. Metres,

5. None - turns off the ruler.

5.9.3 Multiple ItemsIn addition to the Context Menu items listed for Single Items, the context menu contains:

1. Group - click here.

5.9.4 GroupIn addition to the common menu contents, a context menu for a group item contains:

1. Ungroup - click here.

2. Test action – not used

5.9.5 Single ItemsContext menu contains the following items:

1. Cut - cuts the selected item(s).

2. Copy - copies the selected item(s).

3. Paste - pastes the copied or cut item(s) -only displayed when a item has been copied.

4. Delete - deletes the selected item(s).

5. Test action – not used

6. Set action – not used

7. Align to Grid - click here.

8. Bring to Front - click here.

9. Send to Back - click here.

10. Help - displays the help page (from this help file) associated with the selected item(s).

5.9.6 ImageIn addition to the Context Menu items listed for Single Items, the context menu for an imageitem with an image assigned contains:

1. Restore Size - this function will restore the image to its original size if it has beenstretched or shrunk.

2. Restore Aspect - this function will restore the image to its correct aspect ratio at itscurrent size.

5.9.7 LineIn addition to the Context Menu items listed for Single Items, the context menu for a linecontains:

1. Align to axis - this will move the end point to make the line parallel with the horizontalor vertical axis.

ID Card Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 145

5.10 Common Items5.10.1 Align to GridSelecting this option, from the View Menu or a Context Menu, will cause the selected item oritems to "jump" to the nearest grid line or dot.

A snap grid can be ignored by holding down the Shift key when placing an item.

The snap grid is controlled by the snap grid property of the selected card face.

5.10.2 Docking ItemsBy docking one item with another, many fields can be "stuck" or docked together - this can beused to move around groups of items on the card designer.

Items can be docked to the right side and bottom of an object's boundary box. The position onthe side of the item at which the docking occurs is determined by the Anchor Property of theitem that is being docked.

The property set for the Vertical Alignment determines the position docking occurs on the leftside and Horizontal Alignment determines the position of the bottom side.

By default the vertical alignment is set to Top and horizontal alignment is set to Left.Examples of the alignment properties are shown below. The yellow square is the item beingdocked.

Anchor Properties

LeftTop

CentreCentre

RightBottom

5.10.2.1 Docking Items

To dock items:

1. Moving an item so that its top left corner comes into contact with the top right handcorner of another item, or

2. Moving an item so that the left side of its top comes into contact with the left side of thebottom of another item.

A small box will appear when an item is successfully docked to another item. The position ofthat box indicates what that item's alignment property is set to. The alignment examples aboveshow the position of the small confirmation box.

5.10.2.2 Docking Text Data Items

Text data items may change in size when previewed - items that are docked to a text data itemwill move as that text item changes in size,

5.10.2.3 Moving Docked Items

When an item is moved only the items that are docked to it will move with it, not those it is

ID Card Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 146

docked to. When an item is clicked with the primary mouse button and moved its boundary boxwill turn blue.

For example, three items are docked together and the middleitem is moved, it (and the item docked to it) will be move awayfrom the item on the left.

5.10.2.4 Undocking items

To undock a item select it, and either:

1. Drag it away from the item it was docked to, or

2. Right click it and select Undock from the displayed menu (this field is only displayedwhen the selected item is docked).

The selected item will be undocked from the object that it was docked to.

5.10.2.5 Preventing Docking

To move an item next to another, but not have it dock hold down the Ctrl key whilst moving it.

5.10.3 Ordering Items / Groups on the Card Face

Red circle moved from Back tofront.

An item's or group's order reflects its position in relation to otheritems e.g. whether it is on top of, or beneath another item.

The order of an item can be changed using the Bring to Frontand Send to Back commands from:

1. the item's Context Menu.

2. the Edit Menu when the item is selected.

3. The Toolbar.

5.10.4 Zoom FunctionThe zoom function is used to increase or reduce the magnification of a card face - zooming into see details and zooming out for a broader view, or,

Magnification LevelThe level of magnification is displayed in the Status Bar.

ZoomingThe card face view can be reduced or magnified by using:

1. The Zoom function of the View Menu, or

2. The Zoom in and Zoom out Toolbar buttons, or

3. The Zoom Toolbar button, or

4. Your mouse's mouse wheel (if present), or

5. The numeric pad keys + (plus) and -(minus) keys.

To view a full card face:

1. Click the Show Full card face button on the Toolbar, or

2. Select Show Full card face from the Zoom entry of the View Menu, or

3. Select the Show Full card face item from the card face's Context Menu.

ID Card Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 147

5.10.5 MeasurementThe units of measurement used by the ID-Card Designer are: Inches, Millimetres,Centimetres, and Metres.

These options can be set from the Ruler Context Menu, the View Menu, or by the Card FaceProperty Units.

Alarm Map Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 148

6. Alarm Map Designer6.1 IntroductionThe Alarm Map Designer is used to design maps that are displayed in the Alarm Viewer.Alarm Point Tab, such as doors, areas and controller, that are placed on the map and used inthe Alarm Viewer Application to visually indicate the occurrence of alarm.

Typically, a map shows a schematic of the building(s) and has placed upon it alarm points inthe same location as their real world counterparts. A map can consist of many pages, that canrepresent floors, different sites etc.

6.1.1 Starting Alarm Map DesignerTo start this application:

By clicking on the Alarm Map Design icon (pictured left) in the AdministrationSoftware's Toolbar, or selecting the entry Alarm Map Designer from theAdministration Software's Tools Menu.

6.1.2 Alarm Designer Interactive MapClick here to see an interactive map of the Alarm Map Designer

6.1.3 Alarm Map Designer LayoutTo find out more about a specific part of the Alarm Map Designer select one of the following:Menu. Toolbar, General Tab, Page Tabs, Properties Region

6.1.4 Making a MapClick here for more information on making maps.

6.2 Alarm Map Designer GlossaryAdd AreaThe Add Area is located on the left hand side of the Alarm Map Designer application. It containsa list of drawing objects that are used to create shapes, text labels etc on the selected page,and a list of configured areas and their associated alarm inputs which can on the page to build amap, for example, of an area.

Alarm AreaAn area that is associated with a 500 for alarm management. Alarm points, such as doors orinputs, can be associated with alarm areas.

Alarm PointAlarm points are items capable of generating alarms, for example, doors, inputs or controllers.

Child AreaA child area is an area that is contained by a parent area.

Context MenuA menu that is displayed when an item is clicked with the secondary mouse button.

Parent AreaA parent area is an area that contains one or more areas within it.

SelectTo select an item you must first enter select mode, by clicking the select mode icon in thetoolbar, or pressing the select key.

Alarm Map Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 149

6.3 Alarm Map Designer Interactive MapClick an area on the map below to find out more about it:

For guidance on image formats and sizes of maps, click here.

Guidance on Image Formats and SizesOwing to the variety of ways in which alarm maps can be designed and used, it would beimpractical to apply any limits on the format and size of images used. However, it isrecommended that care be taken to use the minimum amount of bitmap images possible. Theadministration software imposes no limits on image formats and sizes but tries to limit theamount of bitmap data stored by resampling any images used.

Ideally bitmap images should only be used to denote item locations such as those used fordoors and alarm points. Wherever possible, use of vector graphics is preferable in order toobtain the best performance and scalable system since the data sizes required are minimalwhen compared to using raster graphics.

An additional benefit of using vector graphics is that they will look good at almost any zoomfactor due to their efficient image rescaling when using the zoom in and out feature.

Where only bitmap images are available for a facility, the best approach is to import these intoand then trace around the areas using the vector graphics features available in the Alarm MapDesigner.

Alarm Map Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 150

6.4 Alarm Map Designer Menus6.4.1 Design MenuThe File menu contains the following items:

New > New Page - Click here.

Import - Click here.

Export - Click here.

Update - Updates (saves) the current map. The map is stored within the database.

Exit- exits the Map Design Editor without saving changes.

6.4.2 Edit MenuThe Edit Menu contains the following items:

Cut - cuts the item(s) or page selected on the Main View. This function is also available in theToolbar.

Copy - copies the item(s) or page selected on the Main View. This function is also available inthe Toolbar.

Paste - pastes the item(s) or page that has been cut or copied. This function is also available inthe Toolbar.

Delete - deletes the item(s) or page selected This function is also available in the Toolbar.

Select All - selects all items on the page.

Page Properties - selecting this item will cause the Properties Region to display the propertiesof the selected page.

Set Page Extent - makes the page slightly bigger than the objects that define its maximumwidth and height.

Align to Grid - click here.

Bring to Front - click here.

Send to Back - here.

Group Items - groups the selected items. Click here for more information.

Ungroup Items - ungroups the selected group. Click here for more information.

6.4.3 View MenuThe menu contains the following items:

Units - selects the scale used by the Ruler. The scale can also be changed by the RulerContext Menu.

Zoom - Displays a submenu which allows you to change the page Zoom level.

Animation - this item toggles the animation state of any animated icons or graphics on thepage.

Small Icons - this item toggles between small and large icon states any area and alarm itemsstates present on the page.

6.4.4 Help MenuSelecting the item Contents displays the Alarm Map Designer helpfile.

Alarm Map Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 151

6.5 Alarm Map Designer ToolbarThe toolbar contains the following items:

Select Enables select mode, which is used to select single or multiple items on thepage. Click here for more information.

Zoom Allows the user to zoom in and zoom out on the page view by using mousebuttons, keys or the mouse wheel. Click here for more information.

Cut Cut the selected item or page. This function is also available in the EditMenu.

Copy Copy the selected item or page. This function is also available in the EditMenu.

Paste Paste the item or page which has been cut or copied. This function is alsoavailable in the Edit Menu.

Delete Delete the selected item or page. This function is also available in the EditMenu.

Zoom in Increase the magnification of the page. Click here for more information.

Zoom out Decrease the magnification of the page. Click here for more information.

Show Full Page Decrease the magnification so that the full page will be displayed. Thisfunction is also available in the View Menu.

Bring to Front Sends the selected item to the front of the page - click here for moreinformation.

Send to Back Sends the selected item to the back of the page - click here for moreinformation.

Group Groups the selected items. Click here for more information.

Ungroup Items Ungroups the selected group. Click here for more information.

6.6 Add Items Region6.6.1 General TabThis tab contains six items that are used to draw and create maps on the selected page.

Shape Item

This is used to create shapes on the page - shapes supported are: circle,square, triangle, star, pentagon, hexagon or a burst. When drawing shapesa circle is drawn by default and can be changed using it's Shape Properties.

Click here to view a shape item's properties.

Image ItemThis is used to create frames on the page which display the image filespecified in its Image Property.

Click here to view an image item's properties.

Line ItemThis is used to create lines on the page whose thickness is specified

Click here to view its properties.

Text ItemThis is used to create a box on the page that displays the text specified byits Text Properties.

Click here to view its properties.

View Item A view item defines a rectangular region on the map, that once configured,will be displayed in the page view when the item associated with it is double

Alarm Map Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 152

clicked, or the Test Action function is used.

Click here to view its properties.

Button Item

A button is used to link to another item or page in the Alarm Map Designer.Clicking this item after its action property has been configured will cause theitem to which is linked to be displayed.

Click here to view its properties.

6.6.1.1 Drawing and Creating Maps

Click here for more information on using any of the above items to draw and create maps with.

6.6.1.2 Map Design Overview

Click here.

6.6.2 Areas TabThe Areas tab contains alarm areas that have been configured In the administration software.

Each area can be dragged and dropped on to a Design Editor page to show the location andstatus of the area in the Alarm Viewer.

Alarm Areas

An alarm area is used to signal that at least one alarm point in thearea has not been cleared (i.e. not been restored and/oracknowledged). Click here for more information.

Click here to view an alarm area properties.

6.6.3 Inputs TabThe Inputs tab contains inputs that have been configured In the administration software.

The inputs can be filtered by selected an area from the drop-down list:

The default is inputs in all areas.

Each input can be dragged and dropped on to a Design Editor page to show the location andstatus of the input in the Alarm Viewer.

Inputs

An input is an alarm point used to signal theoccurrence of an alarm. Click here for moreinformation.

Click here to view alarm point properties.

6.6.4 Outputs TabThe Outputs tab contains outputs that have been configured In the administration software.

The outputs can be filtered by selected an area from the drop-down list:

The default is outputs in all areas.

Each output can be dragged and dropped on to a Design Editor page to show the location andstatus of the output in the Alarm Viewer.

Alarm Map Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 153

Outputs

An output is a relay used to activate a sounder or reset an alarmsensor. Alternatively, an output can also be configured to be setmanually or when an area is armed. Click here for more information.

Click here to view output properties.

6.6.5 CCTV TabThis tab is only displayed if a video source has been defined.

This CCTV tab contains a list of configured video sources, which are used to representcameras, or display the feed from a camera on the selected page.

VideoSources

Once it is placed upon the page this item has two modes of behaviourthat depend upon its Display Mode property.

Click here to view an video source properties.

6.6.5.1 Drawing and Creating Maps

Click here for more information on using any of the above items to draw and create maps with.

6.6.5.2 Map Design Overview

Click here.

6.6.6 Alarm Points TabThe Alarm Points tab contains alarm items that have been configured in administrationsoftware. Alarm points are configured by specifying an alarm area in the Alarm Managementtab of servers, controllers, and doors.

The alarm points can be filtered by selected an area from the drop-down list:

The default is alarm points in all areas.

Each alarm point can be dragged and dropped on to a Design Editor page to show the locationand status of the alarm item in the Alarm Viewer.

Servers

Controllers A server, controller, or door is an alarm point used to signal theoccurrence of an alarm. Click here for more information.

Click here to view alarm point properties.

Doors

6.6.6.1 Changing Alarm Point Views

The alarm points tab has two viewing modes, selected from its Context Menu:

1. Selected Area - only the items associated with the area selected from the pull downmenu are displayed.

2. All Areas - all areas and their alarm points are displayed.

In addition, the view of items in the alarm points tab can be changed, using the pull down menulocated at the top of the alarm points list.

1. Show All Items - shows all items.

Alarm Map Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 154

2. Show Items not on current Page - shows only the items not on the current page.

3. Show Items not in design - shows only the unused items in the entire design.

6.6.6.2 Drawing and Creating Maps

Click here for more information on using any of the above items to draw and create maps with.

6.6.6.3 Map Design Overview

Click here.

6.7 Design Editor Region6.7.1 Design Editor Region Introduction6.7.1.1 Adding / Deleting Map Pages

Click here for more information

6.7.1.2 Drawing and Placing Items

Click here for more information on drawing and creating maps.

6.7.1.3 Editing Map Designs

Select ModeSelect mode is used to edit map designs.Click here for more information.

Moving, resizing and deletingClick here for more information.

Grouping and ungroupingMerge many items into one item, orbreakdown a group into its constituent parts.

Click here for more information.

Context MenusContext menus are used to edit items.

Viewing PropertiesClick here for more information.

Aligning items to the GridClick here for information.

Rulers and MeasurementClick here for more information.

Ordering items on a pageClick here for more information.

6.7.1.4 Properties

Click here for more information on editing the properties of a page or an item on the page.

6.7.1.5 Map Making Hints

Click here to view hints on making maps.

6.7.2 Map Making and Editing6.7.2.1 Map Making Hints

Text or Picture ButtonYou can use a Text Item or an image item on your map as a "button". Pressing the button willzoom to another part of the map, or another page. To do this

1. Add a text or bitmap item to the page

2. Adjust its properties to a suitable appearance, then, in the view property put the nameof a page, or alarm area or preset view object.

3. Click here.

Icon SizeAlarm points and alarm areas have icons associated with them whose size can be toggledbetween large (32 pixels) or small (16 pixels) using the View Menu to set the Small Iconsvalue.

Alarm Map Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 155

ActionIn the Alarm Viewer Application the operator can select an active alarm, an alarm area oralarm point, and all of the Alarm Viewer Application panel's will highlight the selected item.When an alarm occurs the map must show the alarm to the operator immediately. This meansthat the map view must be able to jump to any alarm point or area automatically and display itto the user. This "zoom-to" behaviour can be set up and tested in the map editor.

To jump to an object - double click it, or right click and select Test Action from the ContextMenu.

When you jump to an object it tries to fill the screen with the item specified in the view property.This can be the name of a page, a view, or an alarm area. if the item is rotated the view will alsorotate so the item appears "right way up".

Normally the view for an alarm area is the area itself. This behaviour can be changed byaltering the action property of the alarm area, or by adding a view with the same name.

Normally the view for an alarm point is the parent area, so using the Action Property functionon the alarm point will fill the screen with its parent area (even if that area has a different viewspecified). However, if the alarm point is outside the rectangle specified for the alarm area itmay not be visible, and you need to specify the name of a different page, view or area in theview property of the alarm point.

View items can be added to the map - but they must have a name specified before they can beused. View items are not visible in the alarm viewer - but in the map designer you see an iconand name.

If a view has the same name as an alarm area the view will be chosen by objects that specifythat name in their view property.

There may be alarm areas and views with the same name on different pages. If there is a viewor area available on the current page with the specified name, then that one is chosen.Otherwise all pages are searched and the Action may change to a different page.

Overriding the Area with a ViewThe icon for an alarm area can be placed in any of the 9 anchor positions by adjusting theAnchor property, but you can place the icon somewhere else if you need to.

1. Add a view item to specify the rectangle of the alarm area.

2. Give that view the same name as the area.

3. Move the area rectangle so the icon appears in the desired location. Now the icon willbe where you want it, but zooming to the area or any of its alarm points will fill thescreen with the rectangle specified by the view instead of the area.

6.7.2.2 Adding/Deleting/Copying Pages

Adding PagesTo add a blank page to the current design, select New > New Page from the Design Menu.

To copy an existing page, click on the required page tab, copy it and paste it.

After a page is added, a new tab will be added to the Pages Tab area.

Deleting PagesTo delete a page select it by clicking the appropriate tab, and select the delete function from theToolbar or Edit Menu.

Copying PagesTo copy an existing page, right click the tab of the page to be copied required page tab, andcopy it and paste it using the either the Toolbar or Edit Menu.

6.7.2.3 Alarm Viewer and Map Design Editor

The Alarm Viewer is used in the management of alarms - if maps are present it will displaythem in a viewer. If an alarm point goes into alarm, the appearance of that alarm point on the

Alarm Map Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 156

map will change to indicate that it has gone into alarm, and the map viewer will zoom to thearea associated with that alarm point, so that it fills the map view.

Alarm Point AppearanceThe appearance of an alarm point is modified by the Alarm Viewer to indicate the state of thatalarm point, i.e. whether it has been disarmed, armed etc.

An alarm point's Alarm Status property can be used to view how an alarm point will appear in adifferent states in the Alarm Viewer.Associated AreasWhen an operator configures alarm points he or she associates them with an alarm area.

This feature can be used in the Map Design Editor: double clicking an alarm point, or selectingthe Test Action entry from the items Context Menu, will cause the page to jump to thatassociated area, so that it fills the page view.

ActionZoom to can be configured for any item in the Map Design Editor. Click here for moreinformation.

6.7.2.4 Editing Properties

The properties of all pages and items in the Map Design Editors define their appearance andbehaviour on the page and in the Alarm Viewer Application. Changes to the properties ofanything within the Map Design Editor will be instantly reflected on the page.

Item PropertiesTo edit the properties of an item on the page: select the required item and the PropertiesRegion will display that items properties allowing them to be edited.

Page PropertiesTo view and edit the properties of the selected page select Page Properties from the ViewMenu.

6.7.2.5 Page Tabs

The page area is used to design maps: items from the Add Items and Alarm Points placed hereand are shown in the Alarm Viewer.Additional pages can be added using the New Page command, located in the design menu.The page name, displayed in the tab, is entered in the page's name property.

Selecting PagesAdditional pages are selected using the page tabs, which are located above the page area.

Page CoordinatesThe coordinates of the mouse pointer on the page are displayed in the Status Bar.

Page PropertiesThe page has the following properties:

Name Units

Tool tip Background Colour

X Background Image

Y Snap grid

Width Snap grid size

Height Snap grid colour

Resolution

Alarm Map Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 157

RulersThe rulers on the map area can have their units changed from:

1. the View Menu, or

2. the units property of the Page Properties, or

3. the rulers Context Menu.

Viewing Page PropertiesTo view the page properties, select it by

1. Clicking on any empty area of the page, or

2. Select the Page Properties entry from the Edit Menu

Editing Page PropertiesClick here for more information.

6.7.2.6 Group Item

A group item is two or more items that have been grouped using the group command. A groupitem has the following properties:

Name Aspect Lock

Tool tip Transparency

Action Shadow

X Shadow Y

Y Density

Anchor Shadow X

Angle

Creating a GroupTo create a group, you must select two or more items on the page, and use the groupcommand on the Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.

Ungrouping a GroupTo ungroup a group, you must select the required group, and use the ungroup command onthe Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.

Editing Group PropertiesAny changes made to the properties of a group will be applied to the relevant properties of itsconstituent items.

Click here for more information on editing groups.

Resizing a GroupGroups cannot be resized.

6.7.2.7 Grouping and Ungrouping

When the Group command is applied to two or more selected objects, they will behave as ifthey are a single item - clicking on a constituent item will cause the group to be selected, andclicking and dragging a single item will cause all of them to move.

Grouping ItemsTo group items:

1. Enter Select Mode.

2. Select the required items.

3. Select the group command from any of the following locations: Edit Menu, Toolbar orthe Context Menu of the selected group.

Alarm Map Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 158

Ungrouping a GroupTo ungroup a group and return it to its constituent components, select it and then use theungroup command from any of the following locations: Edit Menu, Toolbar or the ContextMenu of the selected group

Resizing GroupsGroups cannot be resized.

6.7.2.8 Select Mode

Before any item can be moved, resized, group / ungroups or deleted select mode must beentered.

To enter select mode click the select item from the Toolbar or click the ESC key.

Note: The current mode of the Map Design Editor is displayed in the Status Bar.

Selecting ItemsWhen an item or group is selected, its properties will be displayed in the Properties Region.

To select multiple items either:

1. Hold the Shift key down and select the required item.

2. Select a blank part of the page and then dragging will cause a selection area toappear. Any items that fall within the selection area will become selected.

Note: Holding the Ctrl key and clicking a selected item will unselect it.

Select AllTo select all items on the page, use the select all function by:

1. Selecting the item Select All on the Edit Menu.

2. Holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the key 'A'

PropertiesSelecting any item on the page will cause the Properties Region to display the properties of thatitem.

6.7.2.9 Move/Resize/Delete Items

This page describes how to perform the listed actions on single items, multiple items orgroups, after entering Select Mode.

1. Move,

2. Resize, or

3. Delete.

MovingSelect an item or group and drag to move it around. Release the button to stop moving it.

ResizingAfter an item has been selected it is enclosed by a rectangular boundarybox that has on each side and corner grab handles.

Solid black grab handles (pictured left top) indicate that the item or group canbe resized by click and drag. Outlined grab handles in each corner (picturedleft bottom) indicate the item cannot be resized by click and drag.

Items with their Aspect Lock Property set to on, have grab handles in themiddle of each side (picture bottom left), and maintain their aspect ratio whenresized.

Notes:Groups cannot be resized.

Alarm Map Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 159

The size of a Text Item can only be adjusted with the Font Property.

DeletingItems or groups can be deleted from the page by:

1. Selecting the delete option from its Context Menu, or

2. Selecting it and pressing in the Del key, or

3. Selecting and dragging it off the main view and releasing the button, or

4. Using the delete function button on the Toolbar, or the edit menu.

6.7.2.10 Drawing and Placing Items

Items from the General Tab, Alarm Points Tab and CCTV Tab can be placed on the selectedpage by using two different methods:

1. Dragging and dropping.

2. Selecting and clicking.

Dragging and Dropping

Any item from the Add Items Region Tabs can be placed on the selected page by selecting theitem and dragging it to the required location on the page while holding down the mouse button.

Selecting and ClickingItems can be placed on the selected page by selecting it, and then clicking on the required areato place it. How an item is placed is dependant upon whether it is a fixed shape item, variableshape item or line.

Fixed Shape Items

Fixed shape items (indicated above) are items that when placed have a predetermined size,which cannot be changed. However, Text items' sizes can be adjusted by using the FontProperty.

To place a fixed shape item select it and click the required area on the page to place it.

Variable Shape Items

Variable shape items (indicated above) are items whose rectangular size is determined on byclicking twice on the page: the first click specifies the location of the item’s top left corner andthe second click specifies the location of the bottom right corner.

Line

Lines can be placed in two ways: individually or many.

Individually: After selecting the line item, selecting the page defines the line's start point andreleasing it defines its end point.

Many: Selecting the page will specify a line's start point and clicking a second time will specifyits end point, causing that line to be drawn, clicking a third time will specify the end point of thenext line - the end point of the previous line is start of the current line.

To end drawing press the Esc key or click the Toolbar's select function.

Alarm Map Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 160

6.7.3 Context MenusContext menus are menus that are displayed by right clicking on an item.

Click on a link below to view the context menu associated with an item.

Single items - shapes, text, views,alarm point, alarm area

group

Single items - line ruler

Single item - image page

multiple items

6.7.3.1 Multiple Items

In addition to the context menu items listed for Single Items, the context menu contains:

1. Group - click here.

6.7.3.2 Page

The page context menu contains the following items:

1. Cut - cuts the selected page.

2. Copy - copies the selected page.

3. Paste - pastes the copied or cut page -only displayed when a page has been cut orcopied.

4. Delete - deletes the selected page.

5. Zoom in - click here.

6. Zoom out - click here.

7. Show Full Page - this causes the page view with to show the entire page.

8. Help - displays the help page (from this help file) associated with the selected item(s).

6.7.3.3 Ruler

The Ruler context menu allows the units used by the current page to be set, and contains thefollowing items:

1. Inches,

2. Millimetres,

3. Centimetres,

4. Metres,

5. None - turns of the ruler, e.g. for "not to scale diagrams").

6.7.3.4 Group

In addition to the common menu contents, a context menu for a group item contains:

1. Ungroup - click here.

6.7.3.5 Single Items

Context menu contains the following items:

1. Cut - cuts the selected item(s).

2. Copy - copies the selected item(s).

3. Paste - pastes the copied or cut item(s) -only displayed when a item has been copied.

4. Delete - deletes the selected item(s).

Alarm Map Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 161

5. Test Action - tests the an item's action property. Click here.

6. Set Action - a sub menu that contains items present in the design that can be linked tothe selected item. Click here.

7. Align to Grid - click here.

8. Bring to Front - click here.

9. Send to Back - click here.

10. Help - displays the help page (from this help file) associated with the selected item(s).

6.7.3.6 Image

In addition to the context menu items listed for Single Items, the context menu for an image itemwith an image assigned contains:

1. Restore Size - this function will restore the image to its original size if it has beenstretched or shrunk.

2. Restore Aspect - this function will restore the image to its correct aspect ratio at itscurrent size.

6.7.3.7 Line

In addition to the context menu items listed for Single Items, the context menu for a linecontains:

1. Align to axis - this will move the end point to make the line parallel with the horizontalor vertical axis.

6.8 Properties Region6.8.1 Item Properties6.8.1.1 Multiple Item Properties

When multiple items are selected on the page, the Properties Region displays a set ofproperties common to all of the selected items. When these common properties are edited, therespective property for each item will be changed as well.

When two or more items are selected the following properties are displayed:

The following properties are displayed when multiple items are selected:

Tool tips Transparency

Action Shadow

Anchor Shadow Y

Angle Shadow X

Aspect Lock Density

Editing the Item's PropertiesClick here for more information.

6.8.1.2 Group Item Properties

A group item is two or more items that have been grouped using the group command. A groupitem has the following properties:

Name Aspect Lock

Tool tip Transparency

Action Shadow

X Shadow Y

Y Density

Alarm Map Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 162

Anchor Shadow X

Angle

Creating a GroupTo create a group, you must select two or more items on the page, and use the groupcommand on the Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.

Ungrouping a GroupTo ungroup a group, you must select the required group, and use the ungroup command onthe Toolbar or from the Context Menu of the selected items.

Editing Group PropertiesAny changes made to the properties of a group will be applied to the relevant properties of itsconstituent items.

Click here for more information on editing groups.

Resizing a GroupGroups cannot be resized.

6.8.1.3 Shape Item Properties

A shape selected on a page has the following properties:

Name Transparency

Tool tip Shape

Action Fill Colour

X Border Colour

Y Line Width

Width Shadow

Height Density

Aspect Lock Shadow X

Anchor Shadow Y

Angle

Editing the Item's PropertiesClick here for more information.

6.8.1.4 Image Item Properties

An image item has the following properties:

Name Anchor

Tool tip Angle

Action Image

X Shadow

Y Density

Width Shadow X

Height Shadow Y

Aspect Lock

Editing the Item's PropertiesClick here for more information.

Alarm Map Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 163

6.8.1.5 Line Item Properties

A line has the following properties:

Name Transparency

Tool tip Colour

Action Line Width

X Shadow

Y Density

Width Shadow X

Height Shadow Y

Anchor

Aligning to AxisA line can be aligned to the closest axis (straightened) by selecting Align to Axis from theContext Menu.

Editing the Item's PropertiesClick here for more information.

6.8.1.6 Text Item Properties

A text item selected on a page has the following properties:

Name Text

Tool tip Font

Action Multi-line

X Colour

Y Shadow

Anchor Density

Angle Shadow X

Transparency Shadow Y

Editing the Item's PropertiesClick here for more information.

6.8.1.7 View Item Properties

A view item is used in conjunction with Set Action to enable an alarm point to be linked to anarea on the map, i.e. when the alarm point is double clicked the linked view is displayed.

A view item has the following properties:

Name Y

Tool tip Angle

Action Anchor

X

Editing the Item's PropertiesClick here for more information.

6.8.1.8 Button Item Properties

A button item is used in conjunction with Set Action to enable the button to be linked to an areaon the map, i.e. when the button is double clicked the linked view is displayed.

Alarm Map Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 164

A button item selected on a page has the following properties:

Name Colour

Tool tip Image

Action Common Icon

X Shadow

Y Density

Anchor Shadow X

Angle Shadow Y

Font

Editing the Item's PropertiesClick here for more information.

6.8.1.9 Alarm Area Properties

An alarm area has the following properties:

Name Font

Action Colour

X Shadow

Y Density

Width Shadow X

Height Shadow Y

Anchor

Angle

Editing the Item's PropertiesClick here for more information.

6.8.1.10 Alarm Point/Output Properties

An alarm point/output has the following properties:

Name Colour

Action Shadow

X Density

Y Shadow X

Anchor Shadow Y

Angle

Font

Editing the Item's PropertiesClick here for more information.

6.8.1.11 Video Source Property

A video source item selected on a page has the following properties:

Name Font

X Colour

Y Shadow

Anchor Density

Alarm Map Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 165

Angle Shadow X

Display Mode Shadow Y

Editing the Item's PropertiesClick here for more information.

6.8.2 Individual Properties6.8.2.1 Name Property

The name of item. This is not an essential property, unless the item selected is a view whichyou intend to link through other items, and is only required when configuring the ActionProperty.

6.8.2.2 Tooltip Property

Text entered here will be displayed, when the mouse pointer is held above the item in theAlarm Viewer.6.8.2.3 Action and Set Action

Action is a property that allows one item to be linked to another. Double clicking on the itemwill display the linked item (e.g. display Page 2).

Setting an Item's Action propertyAn item's action property can be set by:

1. Selecting the item that you wish to link it to from the Set Action entry of its ContextMenu .The name of the selected item is automatically entered into the select itemsAction Property, or

2. Entering the Name (defined in the Name Property) of the item you wish to link to in itsAction Property.

Testing an Item's Action PropertyTo test if an items action property is correctly configured:

1. Select from its Context Menu the entry Test Action, or

2. Double click it

If it is correctly configured the item to which is linked will be displayed in the page area.

6.8.2.4 X, Y, Height and Width Properties

XThe distance, in the selected units, of the item's origin from the left side of the page. The originlocation is set using the item's Anchor Property.

YThe distance, in the selected units, of the item's origin the item from the top of the page. Theorigin location is set using the item's Anchor Property.

WidthThe width of the object, in the selected units.

HeightThe height of the object, in the selected units.

6.8.2.5 Resolution and Units Properties

ResolutionControls how detailed an object can be drawn on a page. The higher the value, the moredetailed a feature can be and the more you can zoom in. This value, represents the number ofpixels per selected unit within the page.

Alarm Map Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 166

Specifically affects bitmap images, causing them to be resampled so that their resolution is nothigher than the resolution of the page.

Also, with fonts and lines, whose size is specified in pixels.

UnitsAllows the user to select the units that the page is displaying values in. Click here.

6.8.2.6 Background Properties

Background ColourClick the button on right hand side to display the colour picker that selects the page'sbackground colour.

Background imageClick the button on right hand side to display the Open File dialog. This will allow you tonavigate to, and select a graphic file, which will be displayed on the map's selected side. Thefile formats BMP, GIF, JPG, JPEG, PNG, TIFF, TIF and WMF are supported.

To remove the image select its property again and press the delete key.

6.8.2.7 Aspect Lock Property

The Aspect Lock Property determines how a shape changes when it is resized using themouse.

Aspect Lock OffObject's right side is clicked and dragged.

Note how the grab handles' position differ from the Aspect LockOn setting.

Aspect Lock On - item retains aspect ratio when resized.

Object's right side is clicked and dragged.

Note how the grab handles' position differs from the Aspect LockOff setting.

6.8.2.8 Anchor and Angle Property

AnchorThe Anchor Property controls where, in the selected item, its origin is located. The origin isthe point which it rotates and scales around, and whose location determines the shape's Xand Y coordinate properties. For View and Alarm Area items, this property determines thelocation of their icons within their boundary frame.

top left

left

bottom left

top

centre

bottom

top right

right

bottom right

The image below shows examples of how the alignment properties affect an item when it isrotated 45 degrees clockwise . The red dot indicates the shape's origin.

Horizontal alignment: centreVertical alignment: centreHorizontal alignment: rightVertical alignment: bottom

Alarm Map Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 167

Horizontal alignment: leftVertical alignment: centre

AngleEntering a value will rotate the shape around its origin. A positive value will rotate the itemclockwise, and a negative anticlockwise.

6.8.2.9 Display Mode

This property toggles the selected video source's behaviour on the page.

Setting the value to icon will change the video source item to a camera icon.

Setting the value to image will change the video source item to a rectangular, live video feedfrom that video source, which can then be resized as required.

6.8.2.10 Transparency Property

A value between 0 (opaque) and 100 (transparent).

6.8.2.11 Text Property

Text entered here will be displayed in the text item on the page.

6.8.2.12 Font Property

This property controls the appearance of the text in the selected item.

Clicking the button on the right hand side displays the font editor, that is used to select fonttype, font style, font size, font effect and scripting.

6.8.2.13 Multi-line Property

This property allows a text item to be wrap round on more than one line (e.g. when specified asON, a long piece of text can be adjusted by altering its width).

6.8.2.14 Colour Property

Colour PropertySets the colour of the selected item. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display willdisplay a colour selector.

Fill Colour PropertySets the fill colour of the selected item. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display willdisplay a colour selector.

6.8.2.15 Line Width Property

This property sets the line thickness of the selected:

1. line (for lines), or

2. boundary (for shapes).

The default value is 1. Setting this value to 0 will turn the line off.

6.8.2.16 Image Property

This property is used to choose the image file that an item displays.

If the image property is specified as a background image for a page, it will expand to fill thepage, and cannot be resized.

If the image property is specified as an image for an image item, the image will be sized to fitthe image frame, and may therefore appear distorted. An image can be adjusted by using theimage items Context Menu.

Click the button on right hand side to display the Open File dialog. This will allow you tonavigate to, and select a graphic file, which will be displayed within the boundary box of theimage item. The file formats BMP, GIF, JPG, JPEG, PNG, TIFF, TIF and WMF are supported.

Alarm Map Designer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 168

Removing an ImageTo remove an image from a page background or from an image item without deleting it (i.e.leaving an empty frame), select the image property and press the delete key.

6.8.2.17 Shadow, Shadow X, Shadow Y and Shadow Density

ShadowToggles shadow visibility.

Shadow XThe horizontal offset of a shadow. A positive value will cause the shadow to be displayed to theright of the item.

Shadow YThe vertical offset of a shadow. A positive value will cause the shadow to be displayed belowthe item.

Shadow DensityThe darkness of the shadow: 0 will make it invisible, and a value of 100 makes it black. Bydefault this value is set to 20 (light gray).

6.8.2.18 Snap Grid, Snap Grid Size, Snap Grid Colour

Snap GridThere are three options associated with this property:

1. No snap grid - no grid / dots displayed. This option disables the "snap to" when placingitems.

2. Grid - displays a grid on the page.

3. Dots - displays dots on the page.

Snap Grid SizeSets the scale used by the displayed grid / dots in the units specified in the Units Properties.

Snap Grid ColourSets the colour of the grid. Clicking on the button on the right side of the display will display acolour selector.

6.9 Status BarThe status bar, located at the bottom of the Alarm Map Designer application, displays thefollowing information :

1. X and Y coordinates of the mouse pointer, in the selected units for the page.

2. Mode Selected - the icon displayed here reflects the item that has been selected in theAdd Area or Toolbar. For example it displays a picture of magnifying glass and the word"zoom" if zoom mode is selected, a shape icon and the word "shape" if shapes areselected etc.

3. Operator Name - the name of the operator currently logged on.

4. Zoom Level - the current level of magnification.

Alarm Viewer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 169

7. Alarm Viewer7.1 IntroductionThe Alarm Viewer application is used to monitor and manage alarms that occur on yourAdministration Software administered access control system.

Alarms occur when Alarm Points are triggered. Alarm points are items capable of generatingalarm events, and take the form of inputs, doors, controllers or 500s.

When an alarm occurs the Alarm Viewer will:

1. Sound an alarm (if defined)

2. Highlight the Alarm Point or its associated Alarm Area in the tab selected in the Alarm/ Areas Board.

3. Display information about it in the active alarms window.

4. Highlight its location in the Map Region (if maps are present).

Alarm Viewer ComponentsThree components are always present:1. Alarm/Event Region that includes three tabs: Active Alarms, Event Log Viewer and Alarm

History.

2. Areas Board.

3. Alarm Board.

Two other optional components are:1. Map Region.

2. CCTV Region.

7.2 Alarm Viewer GlossaryAlarm AreasAn area that is associated with a 500 for alarm management. Alarm points, such as doors orinputs, can be associated with alarm areas.

Alarm PointAn alarm point is a input, door, controller or a 500 that has been associated with an area, and iscapable of generating alarm events.

Alarm Sensor ResetsAn alarm sensor reset is a relay that is used to reset the condition of inputs associated with anarea.

Area SoundersAn area sounders is a relay that is activated when the area it is associated with goes into alarm. Area sounders are connected to devices that signal when an alarm has occurred, for examplean alarm bell.

Child areaA child area is an area that is contained by a parent area.

Disarm PrivilegeA disarm privilege is assigned to an access group. When that access group is applied to akeyholder, it will give the keyholder the ability to disarm any armed area associated with thataccess group.

Parent AreaA parent area is an area that contains one or more areas within it.

Alarm Viewer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 170

7.3 Interactive MapClick here to view an interactive map of the Alarm Viewer.

7.4 Alarm Viewer Menus7.4.1 File MenuClose - closes the Alarm Viewer.

PC Sounder - selecting this item mutes the PC sounder (there is an identical function in theAlarm Viewer Toolbar).

Acknowledge All - selecting this item will launch the Acknowledge Alarm window.Silence All - selecting the function will launches the Silence All window.

7.4.2 Views MenuRefresh - this item refreshes the Alarm Viewer.

Show Text on Toolbar Buttons - this item toggles the appearance of descriptive text on alltoolbar buttons in the Alarm Viewer.

Muster Report (only if a muster event to action has been specified) - this item displays theMuster Report.

7.4.3 Active Alarms MenuThe Active Alarms Menu is displayed in the Alarm Viewer menu list in when the Active Alarmstab is selected. This menu contains a command that the toolbar doesn't possess: Show Detailsof selected alarm.

Start Automatic Updates - this item starts automatic updating of the active alarms list.

Pause Automatic Updated - this item stops automatic updating of the active alarms. List.

Acknowledge Alarm - this item acknowledges the selected alarm.

Show details for selected alarm - this item displays details of the selected alarm.

7.4.4 Alarm Board MenuThe Alarm Boards Menu is used to select small or large icons.

7.4.5 Map MenuThe map menu will be displayed if one or more maps exist.

Small Icons / Large Icons - toggles the icon sizes on the map viewer.

Zoom In - enlarges the selected map.

Zoom Out - shrinks the select map.

Show Full Page - shows the full map.

Alarm Viewer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 171

Zoom to .. - zooms to the selected item on the map.

7.4.6 CCTV MenuThe CCTV menu will be displayed if one or more video sources exist.

Select – this item selects a video source.

Enable – this item enables a video source to be viewed in the CCTV region.

Expand name / Norman Operation – this item expands the selected video source orredisplays the normal view.

Show Names – this item toggles the display of the video source name(s) in the CCTV region.

Connect – this item connects the video source(s) in the CCTV region.

Save Image – this item saves the selected video source image in the My Pictures folder withan automatically-generated name that includes the camera name and date and time.

Save Image As – this item saves the selected video source image in a specified folder with aspecified name.

7.4.7 Context MenuThe context menu is displayed by right clicking on one or more alarms. This menu containsdisplays the same options as the Toolbar plus: Show Details of selected alarm.

7.5 Alarm Viewer Toolbars7.5.1 Alarm Viewer ToolbarThe toolbar contains the following buttons:

Refresh This button refreshes the Alarm Viewer application.

PC Sounder Click here for more information.

Silence all.. Click here for more information.

Acknowledge all.. Click here for more information.

All Organisations A list of organisational units that are available forfiltering. The default is all organisational units.

7.5.2 Active Alarm ToolbarThe Active Alarms toolbar is displayed when the Active Alarms tab is clicked. It is displayedabove the icon list.

Play

This command allows the active alarm list to update and display alarms as they occur until thepause command is selected.

Pause

This command pauses the active alarm list, and prevents any new alarms from being displayeduntil the play command is selected.

Alarm Viewer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 172

Acknowledge Alarm

Click here for more information.

7.5.3 Event Log Viewer ToolbarUsing the toolbar a user can determine how events are displayed:

PlayAllows the active alarm list to update after being paused.

PausePauses the active alarm list, and prevents it from updating.

FilterThis allows event filtering, and offers the following options:

1. Alarm - alarm related events are displayed when this option is checked.2. System -system related events are displayed when this option is checked.3. Authorised - access authorised related events are displayed when this option is

checked.4. Denied - access denied related events are displayed when this option is checked.5. Comms - comms (communication) related events are displayed when this option is

checked.

7.5.4 Alarm History ToolbarResumeupdates

This will cause the event list to resume displaying events.

Pauseupdates

This will cause the event list to stop showing new events.

7.5.5 CCTV Region ToolbarThe CCTV region toolbar contains the following items:

Expandselectedfeed

Click here for more information.

Show allfeeds Shows all enabled video sources.

Selectfeed

A drop down menu containing a list of all enabled video sources. Selecting a videosource from this list will cause it to be selected (outlined in a red rectangle) in the CCTVboard.

Save feedsnapshot

this command will save a still image from the selected video source. The image issaved to the My Pictures folder with an automatically generated name, consisting of thecamera name, the date and time the still image was saved.

Presets listDisplays a drop down menu containing a list of presets associated with the selectedvideo source. Selecting a preset will cause the video source to behave according to theconditions of the preset.

Zoom

Displays a drop down menu contain zoom options. The available options are:

1. Max Zoom - sets the selected video source to maximum magnification.

2. +10% - increases the selected video source's magnification by 10%.

3. -10% - reduces the selected video source's magnification by 10%.

Alarm Viewer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 173

4. Min Zoom -sets the selected video source to minimum magnification.

Zooming can also be controlled using the mouse and keyboard.

Pan left

Tilt up

Tilt down

Pan right

Click here for more information.

7.6 Alarm/Event Region7.6.1 Active AlarmsThis board is used to:

1. Display alarm information, and

2. Manage alarms when they occur.

When the Active Alarms Board is selected the Active Alarms Toolbar is displayed.

7.6.1.1 Alarm Information

The Active Alarms tab displays the following types of alarms:

1. Current - this is an alarm that is currently active but has not been restored oracknowledged.

2. Restored - alarms that have had the condition that cause them cleared, for example,a door left open has been closed, but has not been acknowledged.

3. Acknowledged - alarms that have not been restored, but have been acknowledged.

Active Alarm List HeadingsActive alarms are displayed in a list with the following headings:

1. Time - the date and time the alarm occurred at.

2. Priority - the priority of the alarm. This is a value between 1 and 99, and it is set in theAlarm Management tab of the selected Area's property page in the AdministrationSoftware.

3. Source - the source of the alarm, e.g. a door or input.

4. Alarm - the type of alarm.

5. Status - the status of the current alarm.

Adding and Removing HeadingsThe Active Alarms headings can be turned off and on by right clicking the headings andchecking/unchecking the items as required.

7.6.1.2 Viewing Associated Active Alarm Information

To view associated alarm information, double click the active alarm point:

1. The selected Alarm Board / Areas tab will highlight all of items associated with theselected active alarm.

2. The Map Region (if displayed) will zoom to, and highlight the selected alarm point thatis causing the active alarm.

3. If the CCTV Region is present, and one or more CCTV feeds exist, with presetsassociating them with the active alarm, those feeds will be displayed.

7.6.2 Managing AlarmsAlarms are managed using the commands available in the Active Alarms tab. Commands canbe issued to alarms in three different ways:

Alarm Viewer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 174

1. The Active Alarms toolbar, or

2. The Active Alarms menu, or

3. by context menu.

ToolbarThe Active Alarms Toolbar is displayed when the Active Alarms tab is clicked. It is displayedabove the icon list.

Active Alarms MenuThe Active Alarms Menu is displayed in the Alarm Viewer menu list in when the Active Alarmstab is selected. This menu contains a command that the toolbar doesn't possess: Show Detailsof selected alarm.

Context MenuThe Context Menu is displayed by right clicking on one or more alarms. This menu contains acommand that the toolbar doesn't possess: Show Details of selected alarm.

7.6.3 Acknowledge Commands7.6.3.1 Acknowledge

The acknowledge command is used by an Alarm Viewer Operator to record information aboutan alarm or alarms that are displayed in the Active Alarms.

To acknowledge an Alarm an Alarm Viewer Operator has to:

1. Select a predefined response from the response menu, or

2. enter a comment into the comment box, or

3. both of the above.

Response MenuOne of the responses in this menu must be selected when acknowledging an alarm. A responseis a pre-defined phrase that has some relation to the alarm being acknowledged, for example,"false alarm", or "door forced".

Predefined comments are entered in the Alarm Tab of the Organization Options window(Tools Menu > Organization Options) of the Administration Software.

Comment BoxAdditional information about the alarm of alarms being acknowledged in this box by theoperator.

7.6.3.2 Acknowledge All

This command will record the same response and / or comment for all occurring alarms.

The Acknowledge All command is launched from:

1. The File Menu, and

2. The Alarm Viewer Toolbar.

7.6.3.3 Acknowledge Selected Command

This command will record a response and / or comment for the alarm or alarms selected in theActive Alarms tab.

The acknowledge selected command is launched from the following locations:

1. The Active Alarms Toolbar, and

2. The Active Alarms Context Menu.

Alarm Viewer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 175

7.6.4 Silence CommandsSilenceThe Silence command this silences the PC sound, it has no affect on the alarms. It is availablefrom 2 different locations:

1. File Menu

2. Alarm Viewer Toolbar.

7.6.4.1 Silence All

The Silence All command silences the PC sounder and deactivates all of the area soundersassociated with the areas in alarm. It is available from 2 different locations:

1. File Menu

2. Alarm Viewer Toolbar.

7.6.5 Event Log ViewerThis tab displays an Event Log - the information displayed here is identical to AdministrationSoftware's event log.When the Event Log Viewer tab is selected the Event Log Viewer Toolbar is displayed.

7.6.5.1 Event Information List

All events are displayed in a list view, that, by default, contains the following headings:1. Date and Time - the date and time the event occurred.2. Category - the category of the event.3. Originator - the name of the keyholder that caused the event or the type of event from

an hardware item.4. Source - the name of the operator or hardware item that is affected by the event.5. Description - a description of the event.

Editing HeadingsEvent Log list headings can be turned off and on by right clicking on the headings andchecking/unchecking the items as required.7.6.5.2 Viewing Additional Active Alarm Information

Alarm Area / Alarm Input InformationDouble clicking an entry in the Event Log Viewer will cause the tab selected in the Alarm /Areas board to highlight items associated with it.Map LocationIf a map is present, double clicking an entry in the Event Log Viewer will highlight its location onthe Map Region.Detailed InformationRight click an event item to view additional information about it.

7.6.6 Alarm HistoryThis tab displays a list of recent alarm events that have occurred within the selected timerange. This time range is specified in the dialogue box Number of hours to show in thebottom right hand corner of this tab, and is limited to a maximum range of 24 hours. To viewalarm information older than this use the Alarm History report, located in the AdministrationSoftware's report tab.

When the Alarm History is selected the Alarm History Toolbar is displayed.

7.6.6.1 Alarm History Column Headings

The following information is displayed:

1. Date and Time - the date and time at which the alarm was acknowledged.

Alarm Viewer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 176

2. Originator - the type of alarm from a hardware item.

3. Alarm Point - the name of the Alarm Point that triggered the alarm.

4. Description - this field contains the comments entered when an alarm is acknowledgedor a description of the alarm if it hasn't been acknowledged.

Adding and Removing HeadingsAlarm History headings can be turned off and on by right clicking on the headings andchecking/unchecking the items as required.

7.6.6.2 Viewing Additional Active Alarm Information

Alarm Area / Alarm Input InformationDouble clicking an entry in the Event Log Viewer will cause the tab selected in the Alarm /Areas board to highlight items associated with it.Map LocationIf a map is present, double clicking an entry in the Event Log Viewer will highlight its location onthe Map Region.Detailed InformationRight click an event item to view additional information about it.

7.7 Areas Region7.7.1 Areas BoardThis board is used to:

1. Issue commands to areas - click here for more information.

2. Display area status - the appearance of an icon indicates the area's current state.Click here for more information.

3. Viewing additional information - see below.

When the Areas tab is selected the Areas Toolbar is displayed, see the Issuing Commandsto Areas section.

Area Board MenuWhen the Alarm Board is selected the menu area will display a menu called Areas. Click hereto view its commands.

Area Board IconsThis icon is the default Administration Software icon for Alarm Areas. Theappearance of this icon changes to indicate its current state - click here for moreinformation.

7.7.1.1 Viewing Associated Alarm Area Information

To view associated alarm area information, double click the required area:

1. The selected Alarm / Event Information tab will highlight all of the events associatedwith the selected area.

2. The Map Region (if displayed) will zoom to, and highlight the selected area.

3. If the CCTV Region is present, and one or more CCTV feeds exist, with presetsassociating them with the selected area, those feeds will be displayed.

7.7.1.2 Viewing Additional Alarm Area Information

Holding the mouse pointer over an Alarm Area will display a yellow tool tip box whichcontains:

1. Area NameStatus - a description of the Alarm Points which that Alarm Area possess.

Alarm Viewer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 177

7.7.2 Issuing Commands to AreasAreas that are selected in the Areas Board can have commands issued to them in threedifferent ways:

1. By the Alarm Board toolbar, or

2. by the Areas menu, or

3. by context menu.

7.7.2.1 Toolbar

The Alarm Area toolbar is displayed when the Areas tab is clicked. It is displayed above theicon list.

7.7.2.2 Areas Menu

The Areas Menu is displayed in the Alarm Viewer menu list in the top left side of the application.

7.7.2.3 Context Menu

The context menu is displayed by right clicking on an area.

7.7.2.4 Areas Commands

The commands that can be issued to areas from any of the methods listed above are:

Arm

Selecting this command will display the Arm Areas window. This window contains a list of allalarm areas, with the areas selected on the alarm board

The areas that where selected when this command was performed will be selected in the list ofalarm areas that the window contains.

Arming an area will cause all of the doors associated with that area to become bolted or locked.This will prevent keyholders without a disarm privilege access to that area.

Also, arming an area may be a pre-requisite for it reporting one or more alarms. When areasare configured in the Administration Software the events that can cause it to go into alarm canbe set to always cause an alarm (i.e. regardless of whether it is armed or disarmed) or OnlyWhen Armed (i.e. the area must be armed for that event to cause an alarm).

An Alarm Area can be armed:

• Immediately, or

• By the specified delay in minutes and seconds.

For example: An parent area contains several children - arming the parent will cause itschildren to become armed as well.

Disarm

This action is only enabled if an armed area is selected.

Disarming an area will cause all of the doors associated with it to become unbolted or unlocked,allowing keyholders with appropriate privilege access to it.

Silence

Click here for more information.

Omit

Omitting an area will prevent it from being armed when its parent area is armed. An omit canbe either permanent or for the next arm only - this choice is given in the Omit Alarm Pointsfrom Arm window that is displayed when this option is selected.

Alarm Viewer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 178

For example: An parent area contains several children and one of the children requiresmaintenance work - if that child is omitted it will not become armed if its parent is armed, but allother children will be armed.

Reinstate

This option will cause any area that has been omitted to become active again.

For example: an omitted child area that has been reinstated will become armed when itsparent is armed.

Reset

This option will cause an area's Alarm Sensor Resets to reset any of it inputs that are in alarm.to a reset state.

Views

This option toggles Alarm Point icon size between large and small.

7.8 Alarm Board Region7.8.1 Alarm BoardThis board is used to

1. Issue commands to alarm inputs- click here for more information.

2. Display area status - the appearance of an icon indicates the area's current state.Click here for more information.

3. Viewing additional information - see below.

When the Alarm Board tab is selected the Alarm Board Toolbar is displayed, see the IssuingCommands to Alarm Points section.

7.8.1.1 Alarm Viewer Icons

The different types of icons displayed on the Alarm Viewer are listed below, and theirappearance will change to indicate their state.

500 servers

500 series controllers

Doors

24-hour alarm inputs

Controlled alarm inputs

Information only inputs (only appears in Map Region)

Outputs (only appears in Map Region)

Click here for more information.

Alarm Viewer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 179

7.8.1.2 Alarm Area / Alarm Point Icon States

The table below shows the different states of alarm areas and alarm points.

Area(Default

icon)

Server Controller Door 24-HourAlarm

ControlledAlarminput

Disarmed

Armed

Partially Armed

In Alarm

Acknowledged

Restored

Omitted Once

OmittedPermanently

Acknowledgedand Silenced

In Alarm andSilenced

Restored andSilenced

Two additional icons, the 24-hour information and output icons only appear in themap region of the Alarm Viewer.

The output icon changes depending on its state: indicates output is on.

indicates output is off.

AcknowledgedThis state occurs when an alarm or alarms have been acknowledged.

SilencedThis state occurs when the Silence All command is executed.

An area can be silenced in any three of its alarm states: Acknowledged, In Alarm andRestored.

Alarm Viewer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 180

RestoredThis state occurs when the cause of an alarm is removed (i.e. a forced door has been closed)but the alarm hasn't been acknowledged.

OmittedThis state occurs when one or more Alarm Point or Alarm Input have been omitted.

Partially ArmedThis state occurs when an Alarm Area is armed, and one or more of the constituents (AlarmPoints or Alarm Areas) have been omitted.

7.8.1.3 Viewing Additional Alarm Point Information

Holding the mouse pointer over an Alarm Point will display a yellow tool tip box whichcontains:

1. Name - the name of the Alarm Point.

2. Type - the type of Alarm Point.

3. Area - the name of the Alarm Area the Alarm Point is associated with.

4. Mode - the mode assigned to the Alarm Point in its configuration page in theAdministration Software.

5. Status - the status of the Alarm Point.

7.8.2 Issuing Commands to Alarm PointsThere are two types of commands that can be issued to alarm points:

1. General commands - these are commands that can be issued to all types of alarmpoints (doors, controllers and inputs).

2. Door only commands - commands that can only be issued to doors.

7.8.2.1 General commands

Any selected alarm point(s) can have general commands issued in three different ways:

1. By the Alarm Board toolbar, or

2. by the Alarm Board menu, or

3. by context menu.

7.8.2.2 Door only commands

Door only commands can be issued to the selected doors in two different ways:

1. by the Alarm Board menu, or

2. by context menu.

7.8.2.3 Toolbar

The Alarm Board toolbar is displayed when the Alarm Board tab is clicked. It is displayed abovethe icon list.

7.8.2.4 Alarm Board Menu

The Alarm Board menu is displayed in the Alarm Viewer menu list in the top left side of theapplication.

7.8.2.5 Context Menu

The Context Menu is displayed by right clicking on an alarm point.

Alarm Viewer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 181

7.8.2.6 Alarm Input Commands

Omit

Omitting an alarm point will prevent it from being armed when its parent area is armed. An omitcan be either permanent or for the next arm only - this choice is given in the Omit Alarm Pointsfrom Arm window that is displayed when this option is selected.

Alarming an area with one or more alarm input omitted will cause it to be partially armed.

Reinstate

This option will cause any alarm point that has been omitted to become active again.

Views

2. This option toggles Alarm Point icon size between large and small

7.9 Map RegionThe Map region is only displayed if a map design is present. Map designs are created using theAdministration Software Alarm Map Designer Application.

7.9.1 Multi-Page MapsIf the map has multiple pages, tabs allowing you to select them will be displayed at the top ofthe viewer.

7.9.2 Viewing AlarmsWhen an alarm has occurred, the Alarm Point which has caused it will be zoomed to on themap.

7.9.3 Viewing the MapThe following commands can performed on the selected map by right clicking a part of it:

1. Zoom in, increase the magnification of the page.

2. Zoom out, decrease the magnification of the page.

3. View full page, zoom as appropriate to display the full page.

By using the Map Menu, or by selecting the map and using the displayed context menu.

7.9.4 Issuing Commands to Areas, Alarm Points and OutputsThe areas, alarm points and outputs assigned to the map can be commanded by right clickingon one to display its context menu.

An area's context menu contains the same commands as those offered in the Areas Board.

An alarm point's context menu contains the same commands as those offered in the AlarmBoard.

An output’s context menu contains the following commands: Turn output on, Turn output off,Show details of output, and Small icons.

Alarm Viewer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 182

7.10 CCTV RegionThe CCTV region is displayed if one or more video sources are present. Video sources areconfigured using the Administration Software Video Source module.

When the CCTV region is present, a CCTV Menu is displayed in the main menu, a CCTVRegion Toolbar is displayed in the CCTV Region and pictures from the video sources that havebeen selected using the Select option on the CCTV Region Toolbar are displayed.

Commands can be issued to video sources by using:

1. CCTV Region Toolbar

2. CCTV Menu,

3. Context Menu – right clicking in this region displays the same options as the CCTVMenu (except Select).

4. Additional controls shown when video sources are expanded.

7.10.1 Expanding Video SourcesDouble clicking or expanding a video source (using the CCTV Menu, Context Menu orToolbar command) in the picture area will cause that feed to enlarge to the size of the CCTVBoard.

When a video source is expanded additional features will be made available, provided theselected video source supports them . The controls available are:

1. PTZ (pan, tilt and zoom)

2. Archiving.

7.10.2 Panning, Tilting and EnlargingPanning and TiltingA single click on a PTZ video source will try to move the camera to centre of the clicked point inthe view.

When the mouse button is held down, the cursor turns to a yellow blob and the position ofthe mouse now controls the speed of the camera. Return the mouse to the initial position orrelease the mouse button to stop. The speed of movement is represented by the mouse cursoras an arrow.

ZoomingScrolling the mouse wheel forwards will cause the video source to zoom in and scrollingbackwards will cause it to zoom out.

EnlargingWhen a video source that supports PTZ isexpanded vertical and horizontal scrollbars are displayed which are used to panand tilt the feed. A slider bar to the right ofthe vertical scroll bar is used to controlzooming.

Toolbar ControlSelecting a PTZ enabled feed will enable the pan, tilt and zoom toolbar buttons, which canthen be used to control that camera.

Alarm Viewer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 183

7.10.3 CCTV Archive ToolsThis is a feature available to video sourcesthat support archiving. Double clicking orexpanding a video source in the CCTVRegion will display archiving tools.

Enabling the Archiving ToolsOnce selected, this feature is enabled by unchecking the textbox labelled live in the lower righthand corner of the window.

Event Control

This control represents a section of time with a starting point and an end point. The track bar inthe centre can be used to move rapidly to any point in the selected time interval. The Arrowbutton on the left will rewind playback to the start point of the selected time interval. The rightarrow will move to the end. Normal playback will pause on reaching the end of the selectedinterval.

At any time, the Cut buttons on the left or right can be used to set the start or end point of theselected interval to the current playback time shown in the tape counter. If you want to select alarger time interval, you can go to the end of the interval and press play to continue playbackpast the end. You can also adjust the current position using the Tape Counter to play backvideo from outside the selected time interval. Use the Cut buttons as before to set the start orend point to the current time shown in the tape counter.

When you select an event or an alarm the event control is set to give playback from 5 secondsbefore the event to 15 seconds after.

To change the time period of the intervals, move to the desired event (using the date stamp orplay speed control) and click the required set interval button ( ).

Tape Counter

This control shows the date and time of the recording currently being shown. When viewingrecordings You can also set the values in this control to move to any position in the recordedvideo.

Play Speed

This shows the playback speed selected for viewing recordings. Speed 0 is paused, speed 1 isnormal real time playback. Larger values are fast forward. Negative values are reverse. Playspeed can be adjusted by entering a number, clicking on the buttons, or sliding the track bar.Pressing fast forward or rewind again will increase the speed.

Alarm Viewer

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 184

7.11 If an Alarm Occurs7.11.1 When an alarm occurs....When an alarm occurs the Alarm Viewer will perform the following actions:

1. An entry will appear in the Active Alarms tab, displaying information about the alarm

2. The appearance of the Alarm Input and Alarm Area will change to indicate an alarm isoccurring.

3. If an alarm sound has been defined, it will alarm will sound on your PC. The alarmsound is defined in the Administration Software in the Alarms tab of the OrganizationOptions wind (Tools Menu > Options).

7.11.2 What to do if an alarm occurs....An Operator has the following options:

1. Silence all alarms - turn off the Administration Software alarm sound and stop anyalarm sounders.

2. View Alarm Point information - to view more information about the Alarm Pointgenerating the alarm, select in the Active Alarms List and use the show detailscommand.

3. View Alarm Map information (this assumes that an alarm map has been created)

a. Double clicking an entry in the Active Alarms list will cause the Alarm Mapdisplay and highlight the item that is generating the alarm.

b. Double clicking the Alarm Area that is currently in alarm will cause it to bezoomed to on the Alarm Map.

4. Acknowledge alarms - alarms can be acknowledged in two ways:

a. All at once - If many alarms have occurred they can be acknowledged with onecomment using the Acknowledge All command.

b. Individually - individual comments can be recorded for the alarm selected in theActive Alarms List by using the Acknowledge command.

5. Restore an alarm - to restore an alarm, its cause must be removed, for example, adoor left open has been closed.

7.11.3 How to stop (clear) an alarmAn alarm is stopped (cleared) when it has been restored and acknowledged.

1. Restored is when the cause of the alarm has been removed, for example, a door leftopen has been closed.

2. Acknowledged is when the operator has noticed the alarm and acknowledged it viathe menus, toolbar or context menu.

7.11.4 What to do after an alarm...Reset alarmThe Reset Alarm command needs to be carried out on any Alarm Areas that have associatedAlarm Points with the Requires Reset option checked.

Event Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 185

8. Event Facilities8.1 Event LogNote

If simple alarm monitoring is being used (i.e. alarm management not licensed), clickhere:

To display the event log:

• Select Tools > View Event Log (via theMenus) or Tools > Event Log (via theExplorer Bar) and the event log isdisplayed.

The following information can be displayedselected by right click on column heading:Category The category of the event (i.e.

alarm, system, authorised,denied or comms).

Date andTime

The date and time the eventoccurred.

1st Source The name of the keyholderthat caused the event or thetype of event from anhardware item.

Identity A unique number identifyingthe originator.

2nd Source The name of the operator orhardware item that is affectedby the event.

Description A description of the event.

The event log has the following toolbar:The Dock or Undock the Event View Window icon docks/undocks the event logfrom the Administration Software window.

The Start Event Log Viewer Automatic Updates icon refreshes the event logautomatically when a new event occurs.

The Pause Event Log Viewer Automatic Updates icon prevents the event logbeing updated when a new event occurs.

The Filter Events by Category icon displays only events performed by a specifiedevent category or categories. The event categories to display are specified byselecting the down arrow on the right of the icon.

The Show controller local date time icon displays all times based on eithercontroller or PC time dependent on the event source time zone.

The Show universal date time icon displays all times based on UT time.

The Repopulate Event View icon updates the event log.

The Print Event Log Report icon prints the event log report.

Event Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 186

The undocked event log has the following menus:ViewChoose Columns Specifies the columns to be displayed in the event log.

Refresh Updates the event log.

EventsDocked Docks the event log from the Administration Software

window.

Start Automatic Updates Refreshes the event log automatically when a new eventoccurs.

Pause Automatic Updates Prevents the event log being updated when a new event occurs.

Filter Displays only events performed by a specified event categoryor categories.

Controller Local Date Time Displays all times based on either controller or PC timedependent on the event source time zone.

Universal Date Time Displays all times based on UT time.

Print Prints the event log report.

To toggle the toolbar on/off:

• Select View > Toolbar > Standard Buttons (see the Menus section).

To alter the appearance of the icons:

• Right click on the toolbar and the following facilities are then available:

• Toggle the icon name by selecting Show Text.

• Toggle the icon size by selecting Large Icons.

To display the full name of the icon:

• Moving the cursor on to the icon but do not select it.

To select which columns to display:1. Right click on the column heading.

2. Select which columns to display from the drop-down menu.

To display information on items associated with the event:

• Right click on the event and select Show Details for item or Navigate to item from thedrop-down menu.

To display information on an audit event:

• Right click on the event and select Show Audit Details from the drop-down menu.

To create a keyholder when an unknown keyholder event occurs:1. Right click on the event and select the Copy keycode option.

2. Select the Keyholder module and New button.

3. Select the Keyholder Keys tab and Add New Key button.

4. Right click on the Key Code field, select the Paste option and the copied key code isentered in to the field.

5. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information for the new keyholder.

6. Select the Add button.

To forgive an anti-passback violation by a keyholder:

• Right click on the event and select the Anti-Passback Forgive option.

Event Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 187

To close the event log:

• Select the Close button on a docked window or on an undocked window.

8.2 Alarm EventsIf simple alarm monitoring is being used (i.e. alarm management not licensed) the events to beclassed as alarms can be specified by customisation and be monitored by the Event Log:

To display the event log:

• Select Tools > View Event Log (via theMenus) or Tools > Event Log (via theExplorer Bar) and the event log isdisplayed.

The following information can be displayedselected by right click on column heading:Category The category of the event (i.e.

alarm, system, authorised,denied or comms).

Date andTime

The date and time the eventoccurred.

Originator The name of the keyholderwho performed the event.

Identity A unique number identifyingthe keyholder.

Source The name of the controller thatwas the source of the event.

Description A description of the event.

To display the alarm view:Note

If an alarm is generated when the alarm view is not displayed, it will appear in the eventlog but if the alarm view is then displayed it will not appear in the alarm view.

• Select the icon and the alarm view isdisplayed. Selecting the icon again hidesthe alarms.

To acknowledge one alarm:1. Select an alarm in the alarm view and the

icon or Alarms > Acknowledge.

2. The alarm acknowledge window isdisplayed and a response can be selectedand comment entered.

To acknowledge all alarms:

1. Select the icon or Alarms >Acknowledge all.

2. The alarm acknowledge window isdisplayed and a response can be selectedand comment entered.

The event log has the following toolbar:The Dock or Undock the Event View Window icon docks/undocks the event logfrom the Administration Software window.

Event Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 188

The Start Event Log Viewer Automatic Updates icon refreshes the event logautomatically when a new event occurs.

The Pause Event Log Viewer Automatic Updates icon prevents the event logbeing updated when a new event occurs.

The Filter Events by Category icon displays only events performed by a specifiedevent category or categories. The event categories to display are specified byselecting the down arrow on the right of the icon.

The Show controller local date time icon displays all times based on eithercontroller or PC time dependent on the event source time zone.

The Show universal date time icon displays all times based on UT time.

The Repopulate Event View icon updates the event log.

The View/Hide Alarms icon toggles the display of the alarm view andenables/disables the acknowledge icons.

The Acknowledge alarm icon displays the alarm acknowledge window for theselected alarm. A response can be selected and comment entered.

The Acknowledge all alarms icon displays the alarm acknowledge window for alldisplayed alarms. A response can be selected and comment entered.

The Print Event Log Report icon prints the event log report.

The undocked event log has the following menus:ViewChoose Columns Specifies the columns to be displayed in the event log.

Alarms Toggles the display of the alarm view and enables/disables theacknowledge icons.

Refresh Updates the event log.

EventsDocked Docks the event log to the Administration Software window.

Start Automatic Updates Refreshes the event log automatically when a new eventoccurs.

Pause Automatic Updates Prevents the event log being updated when a new event occurs.

Filter Displays only events performed by a specified event category orcategories.

Controller Local Date Time Displays all times based on either controller or PC timedependent on the event source time zone.

Universal Date Time Displays all times based on UT time.

Print Prints the event log report.

AlarmsAcknowledge Displays the alarm acknowledge window for the selected alarm.

A response can be selected and comment entered.

Acknowledge all Displays the alarm acknowledge window for all displayedalarms. A response can be selected and comment entered.

To toggle the toolbar on/off:

• Select View > Toolbar > Standard Buttons (see the Menus section).

To alter the appearance of the icons:

• Right click on the toolbar and the following facilities are then available:

Event Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 189

• Toggle the icon name by selecting Show Text.

• Toggle the icon size by selecting Large Icons.

To display the full name of the icon:

• Move the cursor on to the icon but do not select it.

To select which columns to display:3. Right click on the column heading.

4. Select which columns to display from the drop-down menu.

To display information on items associated with the event:

• Right click on the event and select Show Details for item or Navigate to item from thedrop-down menu.

To display information on an audit event:

• Right click on the event and select Show Audit Details from the drop-down menu.

To create a keyholder when an unknown keyholder event occurs:7. Right click on the event and select the Copy keycode option.

8. Select the Keyholder module and New button.

9. Select the Keyholder Keys tab and Add New Key button.

10. Right click on the Key Code field, select the Paste option and the copied key code isentered in to the field.

11. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information for the new keyholder.

12. Select the Add button.

To forgive an anti-passback violation by a keyholder:

• Right click on the event and select the Anti-Passback Forgive option.

Event Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 190

8.3 Alarm AlertsIf Alarm Alert popups are enabled, any alarms will be displayed in the bottom right corner ofthe screen even when administration software is not running.

To enable Alarm Alert popups:

• Select File > Activate Alarm Alerts (seethe Menus section).

Changes will not take effect until Windows islogged off and on again.

An Alarm Alerts icon will appear in theWindows taskbar. The icon's appearancedepends on the area/alarm state:

Disarmed Area

Armed Area

Partially Armed Area

In Alarm

Acknowledged Alarm

Restored Alarm

Server Connection LostTo close the popup:

• Select the icon.

To perform Alarm Alert tasks:

• Right click the Alarm Alert icon and the following options are available:

Show User Interface - displays the Logon window.

Run Alarm Viewer - displays the Logon window.

Option - the following options are available:

Popups for access events - enables/disables No popup for access events,Popup access denied only, or Popup any access events.Popups for alarm events - enables/disables All alarms in one popup, Onepopup per alarm area, or Popup for each alarm point.Activate Alarm Alerts - deselection disables the Alarm Alert popups.

Exit - Exits the administration software and disables Alarm Alert popups.

To disable Alarm Alert popups:

• Select File > Activate Alarm Alerts (see the Menus section).

or

• Right click on the Alarm Alerts icon and deselect the Activate Alarms Alerts option.

Changes will not take effect until Windows is logged off and on again.

Event Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 191

8.4 Event ArchiveArchiving can be performed manually or automatically.Notes

1. Archiving is specified using the Customisation facilities and the name of the filescreated are Edate.CSV. All archive files are in CSV (Comma-Separated Value) text fileformat.

2. Only one archive can be performed each day and archives can only be performed if theminimum number of events to archive are available.

3. Automatic archiving is not possible until at least Archive events older than (e.g. 7)days of events are available (see the Event Archiving section).

4. Automatic archives are then performed at 18:00 only if the minimum number of eventsto archive are available and a manual archive has not been performed that day.

When the event log is 80% full, an Event logarchive due window is displayed.

To manually archive the event log:1. Select the Yes button on the Event log

archive due window or Tools > EventArchiving (either via the Menus orExplorer Bar) and the Event Archivingwindow is displayed.

2. Enter the Archive Destination (i.e. thelocation of the archive file that will becreated) or use the browse facility.

3. Select the From oldest event up to andincluding events on this day radiobutton and specify a date.

or

Select the Percentage of events toarchive radio button and specify thepercentage.

4. Select the Start button.

To view the event archive history:

• Select the Archive History tab.

The following is then displayed for each archived file:Archive Date The date the archive was made.

Filename The file name of archived data.

Earliest Event The time and date of the earliest event in the archive file.

Latest Event The time and date of the latest event in the archive file.

Event Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 192

Discarded An indication as to whether events have been discarded instead ofarchived.

Reloaded An indication as to whether archived events have been restored.

Location The physical location of the archive media.

Comment The comment entered by the operator when events were archived.

To edit the comment:1. Select the Edit button and the Archive

File Status window is displayed.

2. The archive file is marked as Present bydefault but can be marked as Lost if it hasbeen lost or deleted.

3. The comment can be created or edited.

4. Select the OK button.

To display the event statistics:

• Select the Event Statistics tab.

The following is then displayed:Event Total/Max: Then number of events not archived and the number of events

required before archive will occur.

Earliest event timestamp The earliest event not archived.

Latest event timestamp The latest event not archived.

Total days of events The number of days not archived.

Total events for archive The number of events that will be archived if a manual orautomatic archive is performed. If Automatic is 0, theminimum number of events for an automatic archive are notavailable and an automatic archive will not be performed if thiscondition exists at 18:00.

Percentage of eventsarchivable

The percentage of events that can be archived if a manual orautomatic archive is performed.

Event Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 193

8.5 Event Archive RestoreTo restore an archived event file:1. The event report is used to restore

archived events. When the events reportis selected, a range of dates are specifiedand if these dates require an archivedevent file, the Event Archive Restoralwindow is displayed.

2. Select which files to restore and the filepath of their location.

3. Select the Continue button and the fileswill be restored.

4. If a file is not found, an error message isdisplayed which then redisplays the EventArchive Restoral window. The missingfile can be removed from the list and theContinue button used to restore the otherfiles.

Event Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 194

8.6 Event to Action8.6.1 IntroductionThe Event to Action facility enables system actions to be activated based on an event occurringwithin the system. Each set of actions for a specified event is called and each scenario canspecify one or more actions linked to a specific event.

To specify a scenario, click here.

To add each event and its associated action in the scenario, click here.

To configure muster and evacuation, click here.Note

The Event to Action facility for PAC 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers isimplemented via the Output Activation tab of the Controller Outputs page.

8.6.2 Event to Action DetailsTo specify a scenario:

5. Select the Tools tab in the Explorer bar.

6. Select Event to Action Configurationand Event to Action Configurationwindow is displayed.

7. If necessary, select the Details tab.

8. Select the New button.

The following can then be specified:Name The name of the scenario (specified by data entry).

Description A description of the scenario (specified by data entry).

Time Profile The time profile during which the scenario is active (selected from a drop-down list).

• Select the Add button and it changes to Update.

Now add the event and associated actions.

8.6.3 Event to Action ConfigurationTo specify the event and add its associated actions in the scenario:1. Specify the scenario as described in the

Event to Action Details section.

2. Select the Configuration tab.

Event Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 195

The following can then be specified:Type The type of item that may generate the event (selected from a drop-down list).

Name The name of the item that may generate the event (selected from a drop-down list).

When Condition The event that will trigger the action (selected from a drop-down list).

To add an event:

• Select the Add button.

The following can then be specified:Perform The action to take if the event occurs (selected from a drop-down list).

Target The output to turn on or off if the event occurs (selected from a drop-downlist). Not used if the action is to send an e-mail.

Action SettingsThe recipient and subject of the e-mail (specified by selecting the field, then

, and the Configure Send Email window is displayed. Not used if theaction is to turn an output on or off.

To delete an event:1. Select the event.

2. Select the Delete button.

To test an event:1. Select the event.

2. Select the Test button.

To confirm any changes to the scenario:

• Select Add/Update button.

To cancel any changes to the scenario:

• Select Cancel button.

To delete a scenario:1. Select the scenario.

2. Select the Delete button.

8.6.4 Configure Send EmailTo configure an email that is sent if a specified event occurs:

• Display the Configure Send Email windowas described in the Event to ActionConfiguration section.

The following can then be specified:

KeyholderThe name of the keyholder to whom the email is to be sent (selectedfrom a drop-down list). The keyholder must have an email addressspecified.

Event Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 196

Subject The subject of the email (specified by data entry).

Send cause ofaction

An indication that the cause of the action should be included in the email(specified by check box).

Message The message to be included in the email (specified by data entry).

To confirm any changes:

• Select the OK button.

To cancel any changes:

• Select the Cancel button.

Event Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 197

8.7 Muster and Evacuation8.7.1 IntroductionThe Muster and Evacuation facility works through the Event to Action facility, which enablessystem actions to be activated, based on an event occurring within the system. Each set ofactions for a specified event is called a scenario and each scenario can specify one or moreactions linked to a specific event.

To specify a scenario, click here.

To add each event and its associated action in the scenario, Click here.

8.7.2 Specifying the Alarm Point for MusterIn order to configure a muster alarm, several conditions must be fulfilled.

1. The digital input must be an alarm point.Select the Navigator tab followed by the Door option. Select the door to which the Musterevent is to be connected. Select the Access tab. The appropriate SIG frame will show theReader selected in the Muster Configuration process and the name of the Muster event.

Once a Muster has been configured the SIG details are not editable within this screen.

2. Ensure that the Input Mode is a 24-Hour Alarm.Select the Navigator tab followed by the Hardware option. Select the controller through whichthe Muster event is configured. Select the reader through which the Muster event is to beconfigured. Select the Inputs tab. Select the relay through which the Muster event is to beconfigured. Select the Input Configuration tab.

This must be completed before the Muster configuration can be created, otherwise the musterconfiguration will fail and an error message will appear.

Event Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 198

3. Ensure that the alarm is assigned to an area.Select the Navigator tab followed by the Hardware option. In the tree list view of theConnected Controllers a list of the Muster controllers is displayed along with the associateddoors.

Select a Muster Controller to display it’s properties. The properties frame displays tabs forController Details, Doors, Inputs, Outputs and Alarm Management. Within the Inputs tabare the Input Configuration and Alarm Properties tabs. Select the Alarm Properties tab andthe Alarm Area box in order to assign the alarm to an area for display with the Alarm Viewer.

If the area is disassociated from the alarm an error message will appear.

Event Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 199

8.7.3 Muster DetailsTo specify a scenario:

Select the Tools tab in theExplorer bar.

Select Event to Action and theEvent to Action Configurationwindow is displayed.

If necessary, select the Detailstab.

Select the New button.

The following can then be specified within the Details tab:Name The name of the scenario (specified by data entry).

Description A description of the scenario (specified by data entry).

Time Profile The time profile during which the scenario is active (selected from a drop-down list).

Select the Add button and it changes to Update.

Now add the event and associated actions.

8.7.4 Event to Action - 1The following can be specified within the Event to Action Configuration tab:

TypeThe source of the input signal (specified by drop-down menu list) must be aController Input.

Name The name of the signal provider (specified by drop-down menu)

When condition A description of times in which the scenario is active (selected from a drop-down list) e.g. when Input normal, Input tamper cleared etc.

Select Add and a new entry will be created with Perform, Target and Action settings fields.

Perform You should select Muster for this option.

Event Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 200

Target Not applicable for Muster configuration.

Action Settings This box remains empty, except for an expand button. Select thisbutton to display the Muster Configuration dialogue.

8.7.5 Muster ConfigurationOnce the expand button inside the Action Settings box has been selected, a new MusterConfiguration window will open and the following options will be available:

General, Server Printers, Readers.

General Muster NameA Muster name must be added.The OK button will remain grey until a namehas been entered.All alarms must be assigned to an area.

Alarm reset requiresacknowledgement

If checked, the muster will not stop until thealarm generated by the muster start hasbeen acknowledged and cleared.

If not checked, then once the digital input(24 hour alarm point which triggered theevent to action) has returned to its normalstate, the muster will stop.

ServerPrinters

Select and Add the Printer to be used for generating the Muster report. This canbe any printer configured on the PC on which the SecureNet server is installed.

Event Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 201

After the Printer has been selected further options become available within the General tab.

General Report Printing Setup RepeatDelay

Select the time, in minutes, to specify thereport printing frequency.

RepeatCount

Select the number of times the Musterreport is required to be printed.

Readers

Select the one, or more, Reader(s) to be used for Mustering. The list of availablereaders will be displayed for selection.

Note:

Any readers selected for mustering will not be available for normal access use.

Event Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 202

Once the Muster configuration has been completed, select OK to accept the changes or selectCancel at any time to abandon the changes made.

Only one Muster Configuration is available per Organisational Unit.

If an attempt is made to add a second Muster Configuration then an error window will appearstating “License exceeded. You are only licensed for 1 Muster record(s).”

Select OK to acknowledge and close this window.

8.7.6 Event to Action Configuration - 2The name of the Muster Configuration created will now appear in the Action Settings tab of theEvent to Action window.

• Select the Add button to add more actions to perform or Delete to remove the action. Testis not available when configuring a Muster.

To add a scenario:1. Select the scenario.

2. Select the Add button.

Event Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 203

To delete an event:1. Select the event.

2. Select the Delete button.

To confirm any changes to the scenario:

• Select Add/Update button.

To cancel any changes to the scenario:

• Select Cancel button.

To delete a scenario:

• Select Delete button.

Select OK to close the Event to Action Configuration window.

8.7.7 Muster OperationAfter a Muster alarm is raised:

• Muster mode is entered – the event log shows an alarm raised.

• Alarm viewer maximises to show the area where the alarm has been raised.

• The Muster report window opens.

• The Initial Muster report optionally prints.

• The Muster report on screen refreshes each time a token is presented to any reader and/orevery minute if no token is presented.

• Muster mode remains active until the associated activating alarm is cleared, i.e. the alarm isacknowledged and the alarm state is returned to normal.

Note:

• The Alarm viewer will only display if it is already running or if the option to automaticallyopen in the event of an alarm being raised has been selected in the currently logged onoperator’s options.

• The Muster report window will only open if the Alarm viewer opens.

• If the Alarm viewer is closed then the Muster report window is also closed.

• If the Muster report window is closed it can be re-opened from within the Alarm viewer,View > Muster Report.

Each time a token is presented to a Muster reader, the Event log will show two events

• A Token has been presented to the Muster reader

• The Keyholder has been mustered i.e. the keyholder’s name now appears on the Musterreport and triggers the Muster screen and report to refresh.

If a token is used within the alarm area whilst the area is in muster mode then the report screenwill refresh showing the last known location of all keyholders (tokens) still in the building.

If a token is used within the area whilst no muster alarm is in process then the report screen willrefresh showing the last known location of all keyholders.

Other Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 204

9. Other Facilities9.1 ModemsTo configure a modem:1. Select the Hardware in the Explorer bar.2. Select the channel the modem is

connected to.

3. Select Hardware > Modems (via the

Menus) or the icon (in the toolbar)and the Modems windows is displayed.

4. Select a modem from the list of availablemodems

The following can then be specified:Use this modem The modem is enabled for use (specified by check box).

Name The name of the modem (specified by data entry).

Dialback number The telephone number for dialback to the PC (specified by data entryand enabled by check box).

Current Number The current telephone number of the modem (automaticallyentered).

To dialup/hangup a modem:1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.

2. Select the dialup channel, select Hardware> Dial Up, Show Call Progress or HangUp (via the Menus) and the DialupConnection window is displayed.

or

Right click on the dialup channel and selectthe Dial Now, Show Call Progress orHang Up option and the DialupConnection window is displayed.

3. Select Dial Now to dialup the modem, orHang Up to hang up the connection, orClose to close the window.

To reset dialup password:This procedure is required if a Failed authentication for dialup channel message is obtained.This occurs because a password is used to establish communication between the PC andcontroller. If a controller or PC is changed, the password will need to be reset at the controllerand PC.

1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.

2. Select the dialup channel, select Hardware> Reset Password (via the Menus) andthe Reset Password window is displayed.

or

Right click on the dialup channel and selectthe Reset Password option and the ResetDialup Password window is displayed..

3. Select OK and the Reset Password

Other Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 205

window is displayed.

4. Power down the controller.

5. Press the One-Touch™ button whilstrestoring the power and release buttonwhen the LED flashes at its normal rate.

6. Select OK to close the window.

9.2 Modem Initialization StringIf additional parameters are required in the modem initialisation string (see the manufacturer'smodem documentation) the additional parameters can be specified before taking the controllerto its remote location and connecting the modem.

The controller should be connected on a direct line and probed. The additional parameters canthen be specified. After specification the controller can be moved to its remote location,connected to its modem and probed again.

To specify additional parameters for the modem initialization string:1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.

2. Right click on the controller and select SetModem Intialization String or select thecontroller select Hardware > Set ModemIntialization String (via the Menus) andthe Modem Intialization String windowsis displayed.

3. Select the Additional Parameterscheckbox and enter any additionalparameters required for the modem.

9.3 Database BackupTo backup the database:1. Select Tools > Backup Database (either

via the Menus or Explorer Bar) and theBackup window is displayed.

2. Select a folder on the local disk driveusing the browse facility and enter a filename. A default location is set atinstallation. A network disk drive cannotbe used.

3. If the event log is not to be backed up,deselect the Backup Events Table checkbox.

4. Select the Backup button.

A backup can also be performed using the following command:

C:\Program Files\ Administration Software\Bin\UI.exe /BACKUPNotes

1. Administration Software is the name of the administration software.

2. This command cannot be performed on a client PC.

3. A scheduled Windows Task can be created to provide an automated, regular backup,click here.

To schedule a regular backup:A Windows Scheduling Task can be created to provide an automated regular backup.

Other Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 206

Notes1. Further information on running Task Scheduler is given in the Windows helpfile.

2. This command can only be used on the server PC

Procedure1. Select Start > Settings >Control Panel >Scheduler Tasks and the Scheduled Tasks

window is displayed.

2. Select Add Schedule Tasks and the Schedule Task Wizard window is displayed.

3. Select the Next button and use the Browse facility to locate the UI.exe file in the Bin folderof the administration software installation.

4. Double click on the UI.exe file and specify the task name and schedule.

5. Select Next and specify when the task is to be performed.

6. Select Next and enter the user name of the computer (in domainname\username format),enter a password and confirmation.

7. Select Next and select the Open advanced properties for this task when I click Finishcheckbox.

8. Select Finish and add space/BACKUP to the Run command.

9. Select OK and backup files will be created as scheduled. The backup file format name isEKA_yearmonthday_hourminute.ekb (e.g. EKA 20050127_1200.ekb) and will be located inthe location of the last manual backup.

To restore the backup, see the Restore section.

9.4 ImportTo import a database:1. Select File > Import (via the Menus) and

the File Import window is displayed.

2. Select the type of import file from the listand use the Browse facility to select thefile to import.

3. Select the Import button.

NoteAfter an import a database download is required on all channels.

Other Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 207

9.5 Upgrade LicenseThe software can be upgraded to an option that provides more facilities (e.g. more keyholdersand doors (see the Specification section).

Make a note of the license key. If Administration Software is upgraded and re-installed,the license key must be re-entered.

To upgrade the software license:1. Contact your license provider to obtain a

new license key. They will require yoursystem fingerprint number and yourcurrent license key. These are displayedon the License Keys window

2. Select Tools > Upgrade License (via theMenus) and the License Keys window isdisplayed.

3. Select the New Licence button and thenew window is displayed.

4. Enter your new license key provided bylicense provider.

5. Select the OK button.

To delete a licence key:1. Select a licence key.

2. Select the Delete button.

To print the software license details:

• Select the Print button.

To close the window:

• Select the Close button.

Other Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 208

9.6 Configure PeripheralsAn administration reader (desktop reader) can be connected to a controller via PC interface kit.This administration reader can be used to assign keys to keyholders.

The Admin Reader tab configures the COM port that the administration reader is connected.

The Encoder tab specifies additional information required if a MSR206 Magnetic Stripe CardWriter is being used as an administration reader.

To configure the administration reader:1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Select Tools > Configure Peripheralsand the Configure Peripherals window isdisplayed.

3. .If necessary, select the Admin Readertab.

4. Select the channel that has theadministration reader connected.

5. Select the Click to test checkbox, presenta key to the reader, and the key's codeshould be displayed.

If the token number does not appear, check:

• The administration kit is connected to thecorrect port on the PC.

• The administration kit is powered up.

• The administration kit is correctly wired tothe desktop reader, administrationcomputer, and controller (if one isconnected via the administration kit).

• If a PAC 1100/2100/2200 mastercontroller has been configured on theadministration kit channel, theadministration kit cannot be configured ifthe master controller is not connected orcommunicating. If this occurs, deselectthe Online checkbox on the mastercontroller Details tab.

To specify additional information for a MSR206 Magnetic Stripe Card Writer:1. Select the Encoder tab.

2. Select the PC communications port thathas the administration reader attached.

Ensure that the encoder is notconnected to a COM port that has beenconfigured for something else.

3. Select the coercivity (High or Low) .

4. Select the density at which information iswritten to the card (range 75 to 210 bitsper inch).

Consult the reader manufacturer'sdocumentation for correct settings.

Other Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 209

To close a window:

• Select the Close button.

To encode a magnetic stripe card:

• Click here.

9.7 Manage Controller FirmwareUpdated firmware for the 500 series can be added to the Administration Software databaseand downloaded to the servers and controllers.

To add the controller firmware:1. Copy the firmware file to the Firmware

Images folder.

2. Select Tools > Manage ControllerFirmware (via the Menus) and theManage Controller Firmware window isdisplayed.

3. If servers and controllers have beenspecified, select the appropriate tab.

4. If a firmware version has already beenadded, it can be deleted by selecting theDelete button.

5. Select the Add button and the ControllerFirmware Files window is displayed.

6. Navigate to the Firmware Images folder.

7. Select the required firmware file and Openor double click on the file.

8. The Manage Controller Firmwarewindow is then updated with the followinginformation:

Firmware Version The firmware that has been added.

Firmware Type The type of firmware added. Different types may provide differentfeatures.

Min Board Rev The minimum revision number of the printed circuit board required fora download to the controller.

Max Board Rev The maximum revision number of the printed circuit board required fora download to the controller.

Support Hardware The type of controllers supported by this firmware.

9. Select the Close button.

To download the added firmware to a server or controller:

Only download firmware to one server or controller at a time.

Other Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 210

1. Select the Hardware module.

2. Select a server or controller in the ListView.

3. .Select the Tasks button and Firmwaredownload from the drop-down menu orHardware > Firmware download (via theMenus) and the Manage Firmwarewindow is displayed.

4. If necessary, select the firmware version.

5. Select the Download button.

Repeat for each controller.

To reset the server password:This procedure is required if an Authorisation failed (password reset may be required) messageis obtained.

1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.

2. Select the 500 TCP/IP channel, selectHardware > Reset Password (via theMenus) and the Reset Password windowis displayed.

or

Right click on the 500 TCP/IP channel andselect the Reset Password option and theReset Dialup Password window isdisplayed..

3. Select OK and the Reset Passwordwindow is displayed.

4. Power down the server and press the One-Touch™ button for app. 7 seconds whilepowering up. The LED goes out when thepassword has been reset and thenresumes normal flashing.

5. Select OK to close the window.

9.8 Change PasswordTo change a password:1. Select Tools > Change Password (via

the Menus) and the Change Passwordwindow is displayed.

2. Enter the old password.

3. Enter the new password (at least 6characters) and confirm password.

4. Select OK.

Other Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 211

9.9 Search for a KeyholderWhen searching for a keyholder, there are two methods.

Key Seek1. Select Tools > Key Seek (via the Menus)

and the Find a Keyholder by Key windowis displayed.

2. Select the type of reader.

3. Present the key to the administrationreader or enter the key number.

4. Select Find.

Search Bar (only available in Keyholder module)

1. Select the icon, press Ctrl-F orTools > Search Bar and the Search baris displayed.

2. Enter search criteria (e.g. last name).

3. If searching for a key code, select the KeyCode check box and card format. Thenpresent the key to the administrationreader or enter the key code.

4. Select the Search button and thekeyholder is displayed in the KeyholderProperty Page. An icon next to the fieldindicates that the field is being used in thesearch.

NoteThe Key Code check box must bedeselected before adding keys.

To perform a new search:1. Select the Reset button.

2. Enter new search criteria.

3. Select the Search button.

To close the Search bar:

• Select the Cancel button.

9.10 Encode KeycodeTo encode a magnetic stripe card using a MSR206 Magnetic Stripe Card Writer:1. Select a keyholder and Keyholders >

Encode Keycode in the menus, or Tasks> Encode Keycode on the KeyholderDetails tab, or right click on a keyholderand select Encode Keycode and theEncode Keycode window is displayed.

2. A list of keycodes available for encoding isdisplayed

3. Select a keycode and swipe the card andthe card will be encoded (the encodingcan be cancelled by selecting the Cancelbutton).

4. Another keycode can be selected andcard swiped or the window can be closed.

Other Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 212

To print and encode a magnetic stripe card using an Eltron P420 Card Printer:Printing and Encoding Magnetic Stripe Cards using an Eltron P420 Card PrinterThis section describes how to print and encode magnetic stripe cards using a P420 Card Printerand should be used in conjunction with the P420 manufacturer's documentation supplied by theZebra Technologies Corporation.

Procedure to set up the P4201. Connect the P420 to a parallel port of the PC.

2. Insert the P420 CD and install the Windows Driver.3. Select Start > Settings > Printers and Faxes and the card printer should be listed.

4. Right click on the Eltron P420 Card Printer and select the Properties option to display theEltron P420 Card Printer Properties window.

5. Select the Device Settings tab and set the With magnetic encoder to Yes.

If encoding is not required, select No.

Other Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 213

6. Select the Magnetic encoder settings and then the Properties button to display theEncoder Settings window.

7. Select the Restore Defaults button to enable macro processing, start of data to ${, and endof data to }$.

8. Select the Advanced settings button to display the Advanced Settings window.

9. Specify the following settings:HiCo/LoCo High or Low (depends on card type)Encoder position NormalEncoder type ISOTrack Track 2Mode ISO2Density 75bpi (or 210bpi if your reader supports it)

10. Select the Apply button to redisplay the Encoder settings window.

Other Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 214

Procedure to test the P4201. Select Close on the Encoder settings window to redisplay the Device Settings tab.

2. Select Tools and then the Properties button to display the Printer Tools window.

3. Select the Track 2 check box and enter a dummy code in to the data entry field.

4. Insert a card into the card input hopper on the P420 (the magnetic stripe must be on theunderside of the card and towards the back of the P420).

5. Select the Encode button and the printer should printer the card. If the test is successful,the card will be ejected into the card output hopper. If test is unsuccessful, the card will beejected into the rejected card box.

Procedure to print and encode a card via PAC EasiNet/SecureNet1. Select Tools > Card Designer and design a magnetic stripe card for a category (e.g. Staff)

using the ID Card Designer.

2. Select the Keyholder module and add a keyholder with a key that has a magnetic stripecard format and the keycode you require for that card. The keyholder must have the samecategory (e.g. Staff) as the designed card.

3. Select Tools > Options > Access Options and specify the magnetic stripe position andlength.

4. Select the Keyholder Details tab and print the keyholder card using the P420. The card willbe printed and encoded with the specified keycode. Batch printing can be performed byselecting a number of keyholders (all must have magnetic stripe cards) and loading theappropriate number of cards in the printer.

If only printing the back of cards, encoding will not be performed.

When printing and encoding cards for a keyholder that has multiple keycodesassigned, only the first keycode in the list will be encoded. All others will be ignored.

It not recommended to print and encode from the ID Card Designer because theorientation may be incorrect.

Other Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 215

9.11 Configure Organisations9.11.1 IntroductionMultiple Organisation Units allow a customer’s database to be split into logical units for thepurposes of administration. All data from any of the org units is maintained within onedatabase.

Multiple org units are activated by means of additional licensing options. The licenses procuredwill control the number of permitted org units.

Upon the introduction of a new license, a new module is added to the system called ‘Guest’.This allows access to be granted to keyholders from other org units. These keyholders can beadded to the local org unit access groups in order to gain access to the local org unit.

Keyholder name, title and org unit details are shown on the property page (read only), but noother details are accessible.

An operator can be assigned privilege rights to multiple org units. The system will then allowthe operator to login to any of his privileged org units. The operator can have different operatortemplates for each org unit, from “no privilege” with no access rights to “installer” with fullprivileges.

A keyholder in an area that is not in his own org unit may require keyholder forgive e.g. an anti-passback lock-out. As a guest, his keyholder record does not appear in the keyholder list at theorg unit site, therefore the forgive operation is available on the ‘Guest’ module. The operatorcan simply select the event and hit ‘Forgive’. This can also be done from the event log viewer.

‘Keyholder Search’ is available via a search bar within the Guest option.

‘Key Seek’ also searches guests to the local org unit.

The operator sees all entries for all privileged org units when he uses Alarm Viewer. Maps aretied to particular org units and do not contain items from separate org units, however, multiplemaps are visible simultaneously without the need to log into each org unit individually.

The alarm/area status panes are partitioned to display their entries by org unit.

The event log viewer shows events for the current org unit as well as any system events notassociated with any particular org unit.

The event log contains a new column for org unit name

9.11.2 Multiple Organisation Units Details9.11.2.1 License Upgrades

Select Tools > Upgrade License and insert the new code provided. The software must berestarted for the changes to take effect:

• The Login screen has a new box for “Organisation”, select the required org unit andenter the appropriate login details.

• The Tools drop-down menu option now includes the new option “ConfigureOrganisations”, to configure, add or delete org units.

• A new module called ‘Guests’ appears in the Navigator explorer tree

9.11.2.2 Log-in Screen

At the Login screen a new box for “Organisation” appears, with a drop-down menu, allowingthe operator to select which org unit to log into. The box defaults to the option selected duringthe operator’s last login.

The Options button is used to hide or reveal the Server name and Organisation boxes.

Other Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 216

9.11.2.3 Tools Options

The Tools drop-down menu now includes the new “Configure Organisations” option. SelectTools > Configure Organisations and a new “Configure Organisations” window appears.

9.11.2.4 Edit, Add or Delete Org Units

This function enables operators to configure current org units and to add new or delete existingOrg units according to the limits of their license. Changes occur within the Tools menu.

To edit an org unit, select the org unit to be edited. A frame opens with text data boxes showingthe configuration of the chosen org unit, make the required changes and select the “Apply”button.

Click on the Add New button to create the new org unit. A new window appears with a seriesof data boxes. Enter the new org unit name in the “Name” box; give the org unit a Description,Prefix (to be displayed when personnel are visiting other org units to differentiate betweenpersonnel of different org units) and Location.

Other Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 217

Once the new org unit has been created, select the OK button. A new OrganisationInformation window opens showing the customer the new information for the org unit.

To delete an org unit, select the org unit to be deleted then click on the Delete button. Non-empty org units cannot be deleted. There must always be one org unit in the system.

Other Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 218

9.11.2.5 Guests

A new module called ‘Guests’ will appear in the Navigator explorer tree.

This option presents a list of personnel, from other org units within the database, who havebeen given access group privileges, which grant them access to the local org unit. From here,the operator can control their access to the local org unit by changing their access groupprivileges.

The list view displays the guests by org unit and allows simple searches to be carried out.

Other Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 219

9.11.2.6 Operators

It is possible to allocate different administration privileges to operators within the different orgunits available. The operators’ page displays a drop-down list of org units available within thedatabase. Once an org unit has been selected a privilege template drop-down menu isavailable displaying the available operator privilege options.

9.11.2.7 Reports

An operator can only produce reports for the org unit into which he is currently logged.

Some reports may need org unit as one of the report parameters.

9.11.2.8 Alarm Viewer

Alarm Viewer allows a simultaneous view of multiple org units to which an operator hasprivilege rights. Every org unit for which the operator has access privileges will be incorporatedinto the alarm viewer display.

Multiple maps and multiple pages of video sources are available. It is possible to amend theview to show only one selected org unit, however, in the event of an alarm occurring, the alarmviewer automatically defaults to show the appropriate map for the org unit area concerned.

Other Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 220

9.11.2.9 Database Back-Up, Archive and Restore

All operators have database back-up privileges, however, if a back-up is initiated then the entiredatabase for all org units is backed up, not merely the org unit which the operator is currentlylogged into.

If an operator carries out a database archive restore then the entire database is restored to theearlier state, not merely the database for the org unit the operator is currently logged into.

9.11.3 Multiple Organisation Units Configuration9.11.3.1 User Interface

Org unit options needs splitting into system settings + org unit options.

Keyholder search and key seek will need modification.

Event log viewer changes.

Entities from foreign org units are prefixed by the org unit name or prefix.

9.11.3.2 Hardware

Controller downloads include keys from foreign org units with the potential for access. Thismeans any guest who is allocated an access group will have his keys downloaded to thecontrollers for that org unit regardless of whether access is actually required.

9.11.4 Multiple Organisation Units Configure Actions9.11.4.1 Configuring Org Units

• When adding a new organisation unit, the properties are copied from the current orgunit, e.g. custom labels, extra info, token formats, alarm settings.

• When adding a new organisation unit the current operator and installer are given fullprivileges.

• It is possible to delete an organisation unit which has an empty database, but not currentorg unit. It is not possible to delete an organisation unit with any data saved into it.

• It is possible to change organisation unit details such as name, description, prefix andlocation.

• Duplicate and blank organisation unit names are not allowed.

• Operator privilege is respected, it is not possible to view or delete organisation units forwhich the operator has no privilege. It is not possible to add an organisation unit unlessthe operator has ‘add’ privileges in the current organisation unit.

• Discard (Cancel) gives the appropriate warning if details have been changed andunsaved.

9.11.4.2 Login

• When an operator with 'no privilege' to an organisation unit tries to log into the system anappropriate error is displayed and the operator is blocked.

• Guards log into guard view for each appropriate organisation unit, i.e. Event Log Vieweror Alarm Viewer, showing the appropriate data for the logged in org unit.

• The User Interface remembers the last record accessed for each individual organisationunit.

• When the server is unavailable, or the user types an invalid server name, the systemremains responsive and displays a warning triangle next to the server name. Theorganisation unit list becomes unavailable. An error is displayed when the user attemptsto login.

• When multiple organisation units are licensed, the login and logout events include adrop-down list of the available organisation unit names.

• Session timeouts do not appear in the event log, but are displayed to the user.

Other Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 221

9.11.4.3 Operator Property Page

• Copy operator copies template privileges for all org units.

• When the operator changes the privileges of his own account in the current organisationunit, the user interface forces the system to close so that the operator must login again.The operator may change privileges in other organisation units without the logout.

9.11.4.4 Event Log Viewer

• Events for the current organisation unit are displayed, plus any system events which arenot associated with any organisation unit.

• Simple alarms are reported for the current organisation unit only.

• ‘Show details’ and ‘Navigate To’ functionality works for all entity types.

• The ‘Navigate To’ function will take the user to either the keyholder page for keyholdersin the current organisation unit, or the guests’ page for keyholders in other organisationunits.

• The ‘Show Details’ function will show either the keyholder page for keyholders in thecurrent organisation unit, or the guests’ page for keyholders in other organisation units.

9.11.4.5 Guests

• The operator can assign local access groups to ‘Guest’ records provided he has‘keyholder’ privilege in the local organisation unit.

• Keyholders who have access to other organisation units can be deleted.

• The guests’ list supports multiple select and multiple updating (like keyholders).

• Search results count appears in the status bar.

• Key seek will navigate to the guests’ page, if the required key is held by a guest, but onlyif the operator has privilege to view keyholders in the other organisation unit.

• If key seek criteria matches an entry in 2 organisation units, the local organisation unit isalways favoured.

9.11.4.6 Hardware

• Guest keys are downloaded to controller.

• When probing for 500s or IP controllers, if the IP address is in use by hardware inanother organisation unit the user interface makes this clear, rather than allowingmultiple assignment.

• When checking that a dialup channel has a unique phone number, the system checkschannels in all organisation units.

• Modems are available to all organisation units and can be used by channels on differentorganisation units.

9.11.4.7 Alarm Viewer

• Alarm points are qualified by organisation unit prefix or name, when there are multipleorg units.

• Events / Alarms list shows records for all organisation units which the operator isprivileged to see. There is a column showing organisation unit name.

• Video sources are shown for all organisation units which the operator is privileged tosee.

• Alarms in any of the displayed organisation units are handled appropriately and can beacknowledged.

• Alarms not assigned to any of the displayed organisation units are not shown.

Other Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 222

9.11.4.8 Miscellaneous

• Reports are organisation unit aware i.e. data from other organisation units is notexposed to unprivileged operators.

• Data imports into the current organisation unit only.

• Duplicate names for entities are allowed if the entities are in different organisation units.

• Restoring a database restores all data, not just the current organisation unit data.

• Event To Action is limited to entities in the current organisation unit only.

• Licensing limits apply to the total number of entities across all organisation units.

• SWB hardware can only be added to any organisation unit which does not have weeklytime profiles.

• The current organisation unit name appears on the status bar of the application.

Other Facilities

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 223

9.12 Audit TrailThe Audit Trail module gives the ability to track changes made to the administration system. Asearch can be specified to determine what changes an operator had made to items (e.g.keyholders) over a specified time period.

To display an audit trail report:1. Select Tools > Audit Trail or select Audit

Trail in the Explorer bar and the AuditTrail Parameters window is displayed.

2. Select a Start Date and End Date for thesearch.

3. Select all operators or an Operator fromthe drop-down list.

4. Select all items or an Item from the drop-down list.

5. Select the OK button and the AuditReport window is displayed.

6. Different pages of the report can bedisplayed by selecting the Next andPrevious buttons.

7. The report can be refreshed by selectingthe Refresh button

8. If required the report can be printed byselecting the Print button.

9. A new search can be specified byselecting the Parameters button.

10. The report can be exported to CrystalReports by selecting the Export button.

Error Messages

Helpfile All Ver 3.10 224

10. Error MessagesIf the error message does not give sufficient information to correct the error, contact yourinstallation or maintenance company.